Hardware Maintenance Manual and - Page d'accueil

Hardware Maintenance Manual and - Page d'accueil
򔻐򗗠򙳰
ERserver
xSeries 235 Type 8671
Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting
Guide
򔻐򗗠򙳰
ERserver
xSeries 235 Type 8671
Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting
Guide
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read Appendix C, “Notices”, on page 205.
Ninth Edition (February 2003)
The most recent version of this document is available at http://www.ibm.com/pc/support.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION ″AS IS″ WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.
This publication was developed for products and services offered in the United States of America. IBM may not offer
the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries, and the information is subject to
change without notice. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products, services, and features
available in your area.
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2002. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
About this manual
This manual contains diagnostic information, a Symptom-to-FRU index, service
information, error codes, error messages, and configuration information for the IBM®
Eserver™ xSeries™ 235.
Important: The field replaceable unit (FRU) procedures are intended for trained
servicers who are familiar with IBM xSeries products. See the parts
listing in “System” on page 162 to determine if the component being
replaced is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) or a FRU.
Important safety information
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this book before performing
any of the instructions. See “Safety information” on page 169.
Leia todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de executar qualquer operação.
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type Attention et Danger avant de
procéder aux opérations décrites par les instructions.
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine Anweisung ausführen.
Accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di pericolo prima di effettuare
qualsiasi operazione.
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precaución y peligro ante de llevar a
cabo cualquier operación.
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories
sold with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of
California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
ADVERTENCIA: El contacto con el cable de este producto o con cables de
accesorios que se venden junto con este producto, pueden exponerle al plomo, un
elemento químico que en el estado de California de los Estados Unidos está
considerado como un causante de cancer y de defectos congénitos, además de
otros riesgos reproductivos. Lávese las manos después de usar el producto.
Online support
You can download the most current diagnostic, BIOS flash, and device driver files
from http://www.ibm.com/pc/support on the World Wide Web.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
iii
iv
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Contents
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Online support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Chapter 1. General information. . . . .
Related publications . . . . . . . . .
Notices and statements used in this book .
Features and specifications . . . . . . .
Server controls and indicators . . . . . .
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator information panel . . . . . .
Server power features. . . . . . . . .
Turning on the server . . . . . . . .
Turning off the server . . . . . . . .
Standby mode . . . . . . . . . .
IBM documentation CD . . . . . . . .
System requirements . . . . . . .
Starting the IBM Documentation Browser
Using the IBM Documentation Browser .
Using the search feature . . . . . .
IBM Director . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing IBM Director updates . . . .
UpdateXpress . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1
. 1
. 2
. 3
. 4
. 4
. 6
. 7
. 8
. 8
. 9
. 9
. 10
. 10
. 11
. 11
. 11
. 12
. 13
. 13
Chapter 2. Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program . . . . . .
Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program . . . . .
Choices available from the Configuration/Setup main menu
Using passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the LSI Logic Configuration Utility program . . . . .
Starting the LSI Logic Configuration Utility program . . .
Formatting a SCSI hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . .
Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD . . . . .
ServerGuide features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup and configuration overview . . . . . . . . . .
System Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical operating-system installation . . . . . . . . .
Setting up or updating multiple servers . . . . . . . .
Installing your operating system without ServerGuide . . .
Using ServeRAID Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller . . . . . . . .
High-performance Ethernet modes. . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet port connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the integrated system management firmware . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
15
15
16
19
21
21
22
22
22
23
24
24
25
25
25
26
27
27
27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
29
31
31
32
32
32
Chapter 3. Diagnostics . .
General checkout . . . . .
Diagnostic tools overview . .
POST error logs . . . . .
Viewing error logs from the
Viewing error logs from the
ServerGuide error symptoms .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration/Setup Utility program
diagnostic programs . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
v
Small computer system interface messages
Diagnostic programs and error messages .
Text messages . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the diagnostic programs . . .
Diagnostic error message tables . . .
Identifying problems using status LEDs . .
LEDs for Active PCI slots . . . . . .
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . .
Light Path Diagnostics . . . . . . .
Recovering the BIOS code . . . . . .
Power checkout . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller . .
Network connection problems . . . .
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart
Ethernet controller messages . . . .
vi
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
33
34
34
35
36
36
38
38
40
40
41
41
41
43
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units . . . . . . . .
Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System reliability considerations . . . . . . . . . .
Working inside the server with the power on . . . . . .
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . .
Major components of the xSeries 235 Type 8671 server. . .
System-board component locations . . . . . . . . . .
System-board option connectors . . . . . . . . . .
System-board internal cable connectors. . . . . . . .
System-board external port connectors . . . . . . . .
System-board switches and jumpers . . . . . . . . .
System-board LED locations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the server door (tower model) . . . . . . . .
Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model) .
Removing the left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)
Removing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and installing the adapter-support bracket . . . .
Working with adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 5 and 6) . . . . . .
Installing a non-hot-plug adapter (any slot). . . . . . .
Cabling example for a ServeRAID controller . . . . . .
Working with the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option
Installing the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option . .
Installing internal drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal drive bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . .
Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media drive . . . . . .
Installing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an additional microprocessor . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a hot-swap power-supply option . . . . . . . .
Replacing a hot-swap fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a front fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a center fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a rear fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
45
45
45
46
46
46
48
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
55
56
57
57
58
58
60
60
62
64
66
70
71
74
75
77
78
80
83
87
90
95
96
96
96
97
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Completing the installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model) .
Installing the server door (tower model) . . . . . . . .
Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)
Updating your server configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting external options. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the external SCSI connector . . . . . . . . .
Installing the second serial connector . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an external device. . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointing device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel port cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced System Management Interconnect cabling . . .
USB cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gigabit Ethernet cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the server in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/output connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary-device (pointing device) port . . . . . . . . .
Ultra320 SCSI system-board connectors . . . . . . . .
Serial ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Serial Bus version 1.1 ports . . . . . . . . .
Gigabit Ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-485 (ASM interconnect) ports. . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units.
Thermal grease . . . . . . . . .
System board . . . . . . . . . .
Microprocessor removal . . . . . .
Operator information panel . . . . .
Diskette drive . . . . . . . . . .
DASD backplane. . . . . . . . .
Power-supply (non-hot-swap) . . . .
Front fan housing . . . . . . . .
Hot-swap card. . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics panel card . . . . . .
Power reset card. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115
115
116
117
119
121
122
123
124
125
125
126
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
Beep symptoms . . . . . . . .
No-beep symptoms . . . . . . .
Diagnostic panel system error LED .
Diagnostic error codes . . . . .
Error symptoms . . . . . . . .
Power-supply LED errors. . . . .
POST error codes . . . . . . .
Service processor error codes . . .
SCSI error codes . . . . . . .
Temperature error messages . . .
Fan error messages . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
129
129
132
132
134
139
146
147
153
153
153
154
Contents
vii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 99
. 100
. 102
. 103
. 104
. 104
. 105
. 105
. 106
. 106
. 107
. 107
. 107
. 107
. 107
. 108
. 108
. 108
. 108
. 108
. 108
. 109
. 110
. 110
. 110
. 110
. 112
. 113
. 113
. 114
Power error messages . . . . . . .
System shutdown . . . . . . . . .
Voltage related system shutdown. . .
Temperature related system shutdown .
DASD checkout . . . . . . . . . .
Host built-in self test (BIST) . . . . . .
Bus fault messages. . . . . . . . .
Undetermined problems . . . . . . .
Problem determination tips . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
154
155
155
156
156
156
157
157
158
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
161
162
163
164
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance .
Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web
Software service and support . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
167
167
167
167
168
168
Appendix B. Related service information . . . .
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety inspection guide . . . . . . . . . .
Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices
Grounding requirements . . . . . . . . . .
Safety notices (multilingual translations) . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
169
169
169
170
171
172
172
173
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
205
205
206
206
207
207
207
208
208
208
208
209
209
209
Chapter 7. Parts listing for the
System . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard CRUs . . . . . .
Power cord CRUs . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xSeries 235
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix C. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edition notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product recycling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . .
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement . . . . .
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . .
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement . . . . .
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . .
Taiwanese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chinese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement
viii
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 1. General information
The IBM Eserver xSeries 235 Type 8671 is a high-performance server. It can be
upgraded to a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server through a microprocessor
upgrade. It is ideally suited for networking environments that require superior
microprocessor performance, efficient memory management, flexibility, and large
amounts of reliable data storage.
Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key
considerations in the design of your server. These design features make it possible
for you to customize the system hardware to meet your needs today and provide
flexible expansion capabilities for the future.
This server contains IBM Enterprise X-Architecture™ technologies, which help
increase performance and reliability.
You can obtain up-to-date information about your server and other IBM server
products at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/xseries/ on the World Wide Web.
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from the hardware.
Related publications
This Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide is provided in
Portable Document Format (PDF) on the IBM xSeries Documentation CD. It
contains information to help you solve the problem yourself or to provide helpful
information to a service technician.
In addition to this Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide, the
following xSeries 235 Type 8671 documentation is provided with your server:
v User’s Guide
The User’s Guide provides general information about the server, including
information about features, how to configure the server, how to use the
ServerGuide™ Setup and Installation CD, and how to get help.
v Installation Guide
This printed publication contains setup and installation instructions.
v Rack Installation Instructions
This printed publication contains the instructions to install your server in a rack.
v Safety Information Book
This multilingual publication is provided in PDF on the IBM xSeries
Documentation CD. It contains translated versions of the caution and danger
statements that appear in the documentation for your server. Each caution and
danger statement has an assigned number, which you can use to locate the
corresponding statement in your native language.
v Option Installation Guide
This publication is provided in PDF on the IBM xSeries Documentation CD. It
contains instructions to install, remove, and connect optional devices supported
by your server.
Depending on your server model, additional publications might be included on the
IBM xSeries Documentation CD.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
1
Notices and statements used in this book
The caution and danger statements used in this book also appear in the multilingual
Safety Information book provided on the IBM xSeries Documentation CD. Each
caution and danger statement is numbered for easy reference to the corresponding
statements in the safety book.
The following types of notices and statements are used in this book:
v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage could occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.
2
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Features and specifications
Table 1 provides a summary of the features and specifications for your server.
Note: You can use the Configuration/Setup Utility program in your server to
determine the specific type of microprocessor on your system board.
Table 1. Features and specifications
Microprocessor:
v Intel Xeon, 1.8 GHz or higher depending
on server model
v 512 KB (minimum) Level-2 cache
v 400 MHz or 533 MHz front-side bus (FSB),
depending on server model
v Support for up to two microprocessors
Note: Use the Configuration/Setup Utility
program to determine the specific type of
microprocessor on the system board.
Memory:
v Standard: 256 MB or 512 MB, depending
on server model, expandable to 6 GB
v Type: 133 MHz/266 MHz registered ECC
double data rate SDRAM
v Sizes: 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB,
in pairs
v Connectors: two-way interleaved, six dual
inline memory module (DIMM) connectors
v Maximum: Three pairs of DIMMs
Drives standard:
v Diskette: 1.44 MB
v CD-ROM: IDE
Expansion bays:
v Six open hot-swap, slim-high, 3.5-inch
drive bays
v Three 5.25-inch bays (CD-ROM drive
installed in one bay)
v One 3.5-inch removable-media drive bay
(diskette drive installed)
PCI expansion slots:
v Two Active™ PCI-X (hot-plug) 133
MHz/64-bit
v Three PCI-X non-hot-plug 100 MHz/64-bit
v One PCI non-hot-plug, 33 MHz/32-bit
Integrated functions:
v IBM integrated system management
processor (ISMP)
– Service processor with Light Path
Diagnostics™
– Interconnect port
– Dedicated I/O port
– Support for IBM Remote Supervisor
Adapter
v Broadcom 5703 10/100/1000 Ethernet
controller (one port, controller on system
board)
v One serial port
v One parallel port
v Two internal Ultra320 SCSI ports
(dual-channel integrated SCSI controller with
RAID capabilities on the system board)
v Three Universal Serial Bus (USB) v1.1 ports
(one on the front and two on the rear of the
enclosure)
v Keyboard port
v Mouse port
v ATI Rage XL video (controller on system
board)
– Compatible with SVGA and VGA
– 8 MB video memory
Security features:
v Door and side cover lock
v Power-on and administrator passwords
v Remote-control security settings
v Selectable drive startup
v Keyboard password
v System-management security
– User login password
– Read-only or read/write access
– Dial-in call-back
Power supplies:
v Hot-swap (some models)
– Standard: Two 560 watts (115-230 V ac)
for redundancy
Upgradeable microcode:
– Redundant/nonredundant indicator on
diagnostic LED panel
BIOS, diagnostics, and IBM integrated system v Non-hot-swap (some models)
management upgrades (when available) can
– Standard: One 560 watts (115-230 V ac)
update EEPROMs on the system board
– Upgradeable to two hot-swap power
supplies
®
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) alerts:
v Power supplies
Acoustical noise emissions:
v Fans
v Sound power, idle: 6.3 bel maximum
v Memory
v Sound power, operating: 6.3 bel maximum
v Hard disk drives
v Sound pressure, idle: 48 dBa maximum
v Microprocessors
v Sound pressure, operating: 48 dBa maximum
v Voltage regulator modules (VRMs)
Redundant cooling:
Six hot-swap fans
Electrical input:
v Sine-wave input (50-60 Hz) required
v Input voltage range automatically selected
v Input voltage low range:
– Minimum: 90 V ac
– Maximum: 137 V ac
v Input voltage high range:
– Minimum: 180 V ac
– Maximum: 265 V ac
v Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately:
– Minimum: 0.1 kVA
– Maximum: 0.8 kVA
Power available for drives:
v +5 V dc
v +12 V dc
Heat output:
Approximate heat output in British thermal units (Btu)
per hour
v Minimum configuration: 341 Btu (100 watts/hour)
v Maximum configuration: 2600 Btu (760 watts/hour)
Environment:
v Air temperature:
– Server on: 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)
Altitude: 0 to 2134 m (7000 ft)
– Server off: -40° to +60°C (-40° to 140°F)
Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft)
v Humidity:
– Server on: 8% to 80%
– Server off: 8% to 80%
Size (tower model):
v Height: 440 mm (17.3 in.)
v Depth: 700 mm (27.5 in.)
v Width: 221 mm (8.7 in.)
v Weight: 33.5 kg (74 lb) to 45.8 kg (101 lb)
depending upon configuration
Size (5 U) (rack configuration):
v Height: 216 mm (8.5 in.)
v Depth: 674 mm (26.5 in.)
v Width: 440 mm (17.3 in.)
v Weight: 33.5 kg (74 lb) to 45.8 kg (101 lb)
depending upon configuration
Chapter 1. General information
3
Server controls and indicators
This section identifies the controls and indicators on the front and rear of your
server.
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
Front view
Tower model
Operator
information
panel
CD-eject button
USB 3 connector
CD-ROM drive
activity LED
(green)
Disketteeject button
Power-control
button shield
(if installed)
Diskette drive
activity LED
Power-control
button
Hard disk
drive status
LED (amber)
Reset
button
Hard disk
drive activity
LED (green)
Coverrelease
latch
Model type/serial
number
Rack configuration
Operator
information
panel
Coverrelease
latch
CD-ROM drive
activity LED
(green)
CD-eject button
Power-control
button shield
(if installed)
Power-control
button
Reset button
Hard disk
drive activity
LED (green)
Hard disk
drive status
LED (amber)
Diskette drive Diskette-eject
Model type/serial
activity LED
button
number
(green)
USB 3
connector
Operator information panel: The LEDs on this panel give status information for
your server. See “Operator information panel” on page 7 for more information.
USB 3 connector: This is the front USB connector. Two additional USB connectors
are on the rear of the server.
Diskette-eject button: Press this button to release a diskette from the drive.
4
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Diskette-drive activity LED: When this LED is on, it indicates that the diskette
drive is in use.
Hard disk drive activity LED: Each hot-swap drive has a hard disk drive activity
LED. When this green LED is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
Hard disk drive status LED: Each hot-swap drive has a hard disk drive status
LED. When this amber LED is on continuously, the drive has failed. If an optional
IBM ServeRAID™ controller is installed in the server, when the LED flashes slowly
(one flash per second), the drive is being rebuilt. When the LED flashes rapidly
(three flashes per second), the controller is identifying the drive.
Model type/serial number: The model type identifies your server model. The serial
number uniquely identifies your server.
Cover-release latch: Slide this latch to release the cover.
Reset button: Press this button to reset the server and run POST.
Power-control button: Press this button to manually turn on the server or put the
server in Standby mode (see “Server power features” on page 8).
Power-control button shield: You can install this circular disk over the
power-control button to prevent accidental manual power-off. This disk is provided
with your server.
CD-ROM drive activity LED: When this LED is on, it indicates that the CD-ROM
drive is in use.
CD-eject button: Press this button to release a CD from the drive.
Chapter 1. General information
5
Rear view
This section identifies the indicators on the rear of your server. The following
illustrations contain most of these indicators. More information is available at
“Working with adapters” on page 60 and “Input/output connectors” on page 108.
Server with fixed power supply
Fan 1 LED
Fan 2 LED
AC power LED
(green)
DC power LED
(green)
Ethernet link
status LED
PCI-X slot 5
attention LED
2
1
PCI-X slot 6
attention LED
NMI button
(service use only)
Server with hot-swap power supplies
Fan 1 LED
Power supply 1
Fan 2 LED
AC power LED
(green)
DC power LED
(green)
Ethernet link
status LED
Power supply 2
AC power LED
(green)
PCI-X slot 5
attention LED
2
1
DC power LED
(green)
PCI-X slot 6
attention LED
NMI button
(service use only)
Fans 1 and 2 LEDs: These LEDs provide status information about rear fans 1 and
2. For additional information, see “Light Path Diagnostics” on page 38.
Ethernet link status LED: This LED is on the Ethernet connector. When this LED
is on, there is an active connection on the Ethernet port.
PCI-X slot attention LED: This green LED flashes approximately once per second
when it is on. This LED is visible from the rear of the server and from inside the
6
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
server. The meaning of the attention LED is defined by your operating system. For
an illustration showing this LED on the system board, see “LEDs for Active PCI
slots” on page 36.
NMI button: The Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) button is for service use only.
DC power LED: This green LED provides status information about the power
supply. During typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are on. For any
other combination of LEDs, see “Power-supply LED errors” on page 146.
AC power LED: This green LED provides status information about the power
supply. During typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are on. For any
other combination of LEDs, see “Power-supply LED errors” on page 146.
Operator information panel
The following illustration shows the status LEDs on the operator information panel
on the front of the server.
Power-on
LED
POSTcomplete LED
Hard disk drive
activity LED
Information
LED
OK
TX 1
RX
/
Ethernet transmit/
receive activity LED
Systemerror LED
Important: If the power-on LED is off, it does not mean there is no electrical
current present in the server. The LED might be burned out. To remove
all electrical current from the server, you must unplug the server power
cords from the electrical outlets or from the uninterruptible power
device.
Power-on LED: When this green LED is on, power is present in the server.
When this LED flashes, the server is in Standby mode (the system operating
system is turned off and ac current is present). When this LED is off, the power
subsystem, the ac power, or an LED has failed.
POST-complete LED: This green LED is on when POST is completed without
any errors.
Hard disk drive activity LED: This green LED flickers when there is activity on
a hard disk drive.
Information LED: When this amber LED is on, the server power supplies are
nonredundant, or some other noncritical event has occurred. The event is
recorded in the Error log. See “Viewing error logs from the Configuration/Setup
Utility program” on page 32 for instructions for viewing the Error log. Check the
diagnostic LED panel for more detailed information (see “Diagnostic panel
system error LED” on page 132.
System-error LED: This amber LED is on when a system error occurs. An LED
on the diagnostic LED panel will also be on to further isolate the error. (For
more information, see “Diagnostic panel system error LED” on page 132.)
Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED: When this green LED is on, there is
activity between the server and the network.
Chapter 1. General information
7
Server power features
This section contains information about how to properly turn your server on and off.
Turning on the server
Turning on the server refers to the act of plugging the power cords of your server
into the power source and starting the operating system.
You can turn on the server in any of the following ways:
v If the power cords are connected to a power source, you can press the
power-control button on the front of the server.
Notes:
v
v
v
v
1. You can install a circular disk over the power-control button to prevent
accidental manual power-off. This disk, known as the power-control button
shield, comes with your server.
2. After you plug the power cords of your server into the electrical outlets, wait
approximately 20 seconds before pressing the power-control button. During
this time, the system-management adapter is initializing; therefore, the
power-control button does not respond.
If the server is turned on and a power failure occurs, the server will restart
automatically when power is restored.
If ac power is present, the server is in Standby mode, and the server is
connected to an ASM interconnect network which contains at least one system
with an optional Remote Supervisor Adapter installed, the server can be turned
on from the Remote Supervisor Adapter user interface.
If ac power is present, the server is in Standby mode, and an optional Remote
Supervisor Adapter is installed in the server, the server can be turned on from
the Remote Supervisor Adapter user interface.
When you plug in your server for the first time, Wake on LAN® can turn on the
server.
v If your server was previously turned on, it must be properly placed in Standby
mode for the Wake on LAN feature to turn on the server.
8
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Complete the following steps to manually turn on the server:
1. Review the information in “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn on all external devices, such as the monitor.
3. Plug the server power cords into the power source.
4. Press the power-control button on the front of the server.
Note: While the server is powering up, the power-on LED on the front of the
server is lit.
Turning off the server
Turning off the server refers to the act of disconnecting the server from the power
source.
Complete the following steps to manually turn off the server:
1. Review the information in “Safety information” on page 169.
2. See your operating system documentation for the proper procedure to shut
down the operating system.
Statement 5:
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the
power supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device.
The device also might have more than one power cord. To remove all
electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are
disconnected from the power source.
2
1
3. Press the power-control button on the front of the server. This will put the server
in Standby mode.
Note: You might need to press and hold the power-control button for more than
4 seconds to cause an immediate shutdown of the server and to force it
into Standby mode. You can use this feature if the operating system
stops functioning.
4. Disconnect the server from the power source.
Note: After disconnecting all the power cords, wait approximately 15 seconds
for your system to stop running. Watch for the power-on LED on the front
of the server to stop flashing.
Standby mode
Standby mode refers to the condition in which the server is connected to an ac
power source but the server operating system is not running and all core logic is
Chapter 1. General information
9
shut down except for the service processor. In Standby mode, the server can
respond to service processor requests, such as a remote request to turn on the
server. When the server is in Standby mode, the power-on LED on the front of the
server flashes (when the server is running, the power-on LED stays on and does
not flash).
You can put the server in Standby mode in any of the following ways:
v You can press the power-control button on the server. This starts an orderly
shutdown of the operating system, if this feature is supported by your operating
system.
v If the server is connected to an ASM interconnect network which contains at least
one system with an optional Remote Supervisor Adapter installed, the server can
be placed in Standby mode from the Remote Supervisor Adapter user interface.
v If an optional Remote Supervisor Adapter is installed in the server, the server can
be placed in Standby mode from the Remote Supervisor Adapter user interface.
Attention: You must disconnect all the server power cords from the electrical
outlets to remove all power from the server.
Complete the following steps to put the server into Standby mode:
1. See the operating system documentation for the proper procedure to shut down
the operating system.
Note: Each operating system is different. Read all the documentation about
shutting down the operating system before continuing.
2. Press the power-control button on the front of the server.
Notes:
a. After you place the server in Standby mode, wait at least 5 seconds before
you turn on the server again.
b. You might need to press and hold the power-control button for more than 4
seconds to cause an immediate shutdown of the operating system and to
force it into Standby mode. You can use this feature if the operating system
stops functioning.
The ISMP can put the server in Standby mode as an automatic response to a
critical system failure. You can also put the server into Standby mode remotely by
means of an optional Remote Supervisor Adapter or through connection to an ASM
interconnect network.
IBM documentation CD
Your server comes with a documentation CD, which contains documentation for
your server in Portable Document Format (PDF) and includes the IBM
Documentation Browser to help you find information quickly.
System requirements
To run the documentation CD, your system must have the following minimum
hardware and software:
v Microsoft® Windows NT® 4.0 (with Service Pack 3 or later), Windows® 98, or
Windows 2000.
v 100 MHz Intel Pentium® microprocessor.
v 32 MB RAM.
10
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 or later. Adobe Acrobat Reader software is included
on the documentation CD, and you can install it when you run the IBM
Documentation Browser.
Starting the IBM Documentation Browser
Use one of the following procedures to start the Documentation Browser:
v If Autostart is enabled, insert the documentation CD into your CD-ROM drive.
The Documentation Browser will start automatically.
v If Autostart is disabled, insert the documentation CD into your CD-ROM drive;
then, click Start --> Run. In the Open field, type
e:\win32.bat
where e is the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive, and click OK.
Using the IBM Documentation Browser
Use the IBM Documentation Browser to browse the contents of the documentation
CD, select from a list of available topics, see brief descriptions of the selected
topics, and view selected topics using Adobe Acrobat Reader. The Documentation
Browser automatically detects the regional settings in use on your system and
presents the information in the language for that region (if available). If a topic is not
available in the language for that region, the English version is displayed.
Click Help for detailed information about using the IBM Documentation Browser.
Complete the following steps to use the Documentation Browser:
1. Select your product from the Product drop-down list.
The Topics list appears. It lists all topics that pertain to the selected product.
Topics are in folders or under other topics. A plus sign (+) appears beside each
folder or topic that has additional topics under it. Click the plus sign to display
the additional topics.
2. Click a topic to select it.
When you select a topic, a description of the topic contents appears in the
Description field.
Note: To select multiple topics, press and hold down the Ctrl key while
selecting your topics.
3. View selected topics.
Click View Book. Adobe Acrobat Reader starts, and the selected topics are
displayed.
Using the search feature
Complete the following steps to use the Documentation Browser search feature:
1. Type a key word in the Search field.
2. Click Search. The topics containing the search word are listed in order based
on the number of occurrences.
3. Click a file to open it.
4. Press Ctrl+F and use the Adobe Acrobat search function to search within the
file.
Chapter 1. General information
11
IBM Director
With IBM Director, a network administrator can:
v View the hardware configuration of remote systems, in detail
v Monitor the usage and performance of critical components, such as
microprocessors, disks, and memory
v Centrally manage individual or large groups of IBM and non-IBM Intel-based
servers, desktop computers, workstations, and mobile computers on a variety of
platforms
IBM Director provides a comprehensive entry-level workgroup hardware manager.
Key features include:
v Advanced self-management capabilities for maximum system availability
v Multiple operating-system platform support, including Microsoft Windows 98,
Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, Novell NetWare, IBM
OS/2®, SCO UnixWare, Linux®, and Caldera OpenUNIX®
v Support for IBM and non-IBM servers, desktop computers, workstations, and
mobile computers
v Support for systems-management industry standards
v Integration into leading workgroup and enterprise systems-management
environments
v Ease of use, training, and setup
IBM Director also provides an extensible platform that supports advanced server
tools that are designed to reduce the total cost of managing and supporting
networked systems. By deploying IBM Director, you can achieve reductions in
ownership costs through:
v Reduced downtime
v Increased productivity of IT personnel and users
v Reduced service and support costs
For more information about IBM Director, see the IBM Director CD that comes with
your server, the IBM Director publications on the CD, and the following Web pages:
Systems Management - Director Package
http://www.ibm.com/pc/qtechinfo/MIGR-40738.html
This Web page includes links to software downloads and publications for
the latest release of IBM Director.
IBM xSeries Systems Management page
http://www.ibm.com/pc/ww/eserver/xseries/systems_management/index.html
This Web page presents an overview of IBM Systems Management and
IBM Director.
IBM Universal Manageability page
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/pc/um/index.html
This Web page links to an IBM portfolio of advanced management tools
that help reduce costs and increase availability throughout the life cycle of a
product.
12
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Installing IBM Director updates
If you plan to use IBM Director to manage your server, you must install the
applicable IBM Director updates, which could include a Service Pack for your
release of IBM Director, individual emergency fixes (eFixes), and a Director System
Support Package (DSSP) for this server.
Note: For Automatic Server Restart (ASR) support and environmental-sensor
support, you must install version 4.1 of IBM Director.
To install the IBM Director updates, complete the following steps, in order:
1. If you plan to enable the Automatic Server Restart (ASR) feature, install the
ASR device driver, which is available from the IBM Web site:
a. Go to the IBM Web site at http://www.ibm.com.
b. Click Support & downloads.
c. In the Technical support keyword search field, type Advanced System
Management 8647 and click Go.
d. From the next page, click IBM Advanced System Management Device
Driver Diskette for Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0
Version 2.07 (or a later version, if it is available).
e. From the next page, download the executable file and follow the instructions
in the readme file to install the device driver.
2. Install the IBM Director application.
3. If the IBM Director CD that comes with your server includes the IBM Director
Service Pack, install the Service Pack. If the CD does not contain the Service
Pack, check the IBM Web site to see if a Service Pack is available. If it is,
download and install the Service Pack according to the instructions in its
readme file.
4. Install any applicable eFixes, DSSPs, and additional updates for your server
from the IBM Web site.
Complete the following steps to obtain and install eFixes, DSSPs, or other updates:
1. Go to the IBM Web site at http://www.ibm.com.
2. Click Support & downloads.
3. In the Technical support keyword search field, type Director 8647 and click
Go.
4. From the next page, click the eFix, DSSP, or update that you want to download.
5. From the next page, download the executable file and follow the instructions in
the readme file to install the update.
UpdateXpress
The UpdateXpress program is available for most xSeries servers and server
options. It detects supported and installed device drivers and firmware in your
server and installs available updates. You can download the UpdateXpress program
from the Web at no additional cost, or you can purchase it on a CD. To download
the program or purchase the CD, go to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/ww/eserver/xseries/serverguide/xpress.html.
Chapter 1. General information
13
14
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 2. Configuration
The following configuration programs are provided with your server:
v Configuration/Setup Utility
This program is part of the basic input/output system (BIOS) code that comes
with your server. You can use this program to configure serial and parallel port
assignments, change interrupt request (IRQ) settings, change the drive startup
sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords. You also can use this
program to view the system configuration settings, for example, the number and
type of installed microprocessors, the amount of installed memory, or the BIOS
diagnostics version level. See “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program” for
more information.
v LSI Logic Configuration Utility
With the built-in LSI Logic Configuration Utility program, you can configure the
integrated SCSI controller and the devices that are attached to it. See “Using the
LSI Logic Configuration Utility program” on page 21.
v ServeRAID Manager
The ServeRAID programs come with your server. If your server has a ServeRAID
controller installed, or if you are using the integrated SCSI controller with RAID
capabilities as a RAID controller, you must use the ServeRAID Manager program
to define and configure your disk-array subsystem before you install your
operating system. See “Using ServeRAID Manager” on page 25 for more
information.
v ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD provides software setup tools and
installation tools that are designed for your IBM server. Use this CD during the
initial installation of your server to configure basic hardware features, such as an
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities, and to simplify your operating
system installation. See “Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD” on
page 22.
v Ethernet controller configuration process
To configure the integrated Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the Gigabit
Ethernet controller” on page 26.
v Integrated System Management update and configuration
To update the integrated system management (ISM) firmware, see “Updating the
integrated system management firmware” on page 27.
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program
This section provides instructions to start the Configuration/Setup Utility program
and descriptions of the available menu choices.
Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program
To start the Configuration/Setup Utility program:
1. Turn on the server and watch the monitor screen.
2. When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Note: If you have set both levels of passwords (power-on and administrator),
you must type the administrator password to access the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu. Without the administrator password,
limited Configuration/Setup Utility program functions are available.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
15
3. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Choices available from the Configuration/Setup main menu
From the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, you can select settings that you
want to view or change. The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu is similar to the
following.
IBM Setup - (c) Copyright IBM Corporation 2002
Configuration/Setup Utility
System Summary
System Information
Devices and I/O Ports
Date and Time
System Security
Start Options
Advanced Setup
Error Logs
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Default Settings
Exit Setup
<F1> Help
<Esc> Exit
< > < > Move
<Enter> Select
Notes:
1. You can press F1 to display help information for a selected menu item.
2. The choices on some menus might differ slightly, depending on the BIOS
version in your server.
Descriptions of the choices available from the main menu are:
v System Summary
Select this choice to display configuration information. This includes the type,
speed, and cache sizes of the microprocessors and the amount of memory
installed.
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on this summary screen.
You cannot edit the fields.
This choice appears on both the full and limited Configuration/Setup Utility
menus.
v System Information
Select this choice to display information about your server. Changes that you
make on other menus might appear on this summary screen. You cannot edit
any fields. The System Information choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
– Product Data
Select this choice to view system information, such as the machine type and
model, the server serial number, and the revision level or issue date of the
BIOS and diagnostics code stored in the electrically erasable programmable
ROM (EEPROM).
v Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change the assignments for devices and
input/output (I/O) ports. This choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup
Utility main menu.
16
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
You can use this choice also to enable or disable the integrated SCSI controller
with RAID capabilities and Ethernet controllers, and all standard ports (serial,
parallel, and so on).
– The default setting is Enable for all the controllers. If you select Disable, the
system will not configure the disabled device and the operating system will not
detect the device. (This is equivalent to unplugging the device.)
– If the integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities is disabled and no
SCSI adapter is installed, the server will have no SCSI capability.
– If the on-board Ethernet controller is disabled and no Ethernet adapter is
installed, the server will have no Ethernet capability.
v Date and Time
Select this choice to set the system date and time. This choice appears only on
the full Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
The system time is in a 24-hour format (hour:minute:second).
v System Security
Select this choice to set passwords or the Remote Control Security settings. This
choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
You can implement two levels of password protection:
– Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Using
passwords” on page 19 for more information.
– Administrator Password
Attention: If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be
overridden or removed. You must replace the system board.
Note: This choice is available on the Configuration/Setup Utility menu only if
the optional IBM Remote Supervisor Adapter is installed in your server.
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password.
The administrator password provides access to all choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You can set, change, or delete both
the administrator and power-on passwords and allow a power-on password to
be changed by the user.
See “Using passwords” on page 19 for more information.
v Start Options
Select this choice to view or change the start options. This choice appears only
on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. Start options take effect when
you start your server.
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as the keyboard speed.
You also can specify whether the keyboard number lock starts on or off. You also
can enable the server to run without a diskette drive, monitor, or keyboard.
The server uses a startup sequence to determine the device from which the
operating system is loaded. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a startable diskette in the diskette drive, then checks the hard disk
drive in bay 0, and then checks a network adapter.
If your server contains Wake on LAN hardware and software and your operating
system supports Wake on LAN functions, you can also define a startup sequence
for the Wake on LAN functions.
Chapter 2. Configuration
17
If the Boot Fail Count choice is enabled, you can restore the BIOS system
defaults after three consecutive boot failures. If this choice is disabled, the BIOS
system defaults can be loaded only from the Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
You also can select whether the integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities
or a PCI SCSI adapter is given boot precedence. Select Planar SCSI to give the
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities boot precedence. If a PCI SCSI
adapter is to be given boot precedence, select the slot number where this
adapter is installed.
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks for changes in the master boot
record at startup.
v Advanced Setup
Select this choice to change values for advanced hardware features, such as
cache control, and PCI configuration. This choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
A warning message appears above the choices on this menu to alert you that the
system might malfunction if these options are configured incorrectly. Follow the
instructions on the screen carefully.
– System Partition Visibility
Select this choice to indicate whether the System Partition is visible. To make
the System Partition visible, set this choice to Visible. To make the System
Partition invisible, set this choice to Hidden. See “Using the ServerGuide
Setup and Installation CD” on page 22 for additional information about the
System Partition.
– Memory Settings
Select this choice to manually enable a pair of memory connectors.
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory configuration, the
server will automatically disable the failing pair of memory connectors and
continue operating with reduced memory capacity. If this occurs, you must
manually enable the set of memory connectors after the problem is corrected.
Select Memory Settings from the Advanced Setup menu, and use the arrow
keys to highlight the pair of memory connectors that you want to enable; then,
use the arrow keys to select Enable.
– CPU Options
Select this choice to indicate whether the microprocessor serial number in the
microprocessor is readable or to set the microprocessor cache mode to
disabled, write-back, or write-through. Selecting write-back mode will provide
better system performance.
– PCI Bus Control
Select this choice to view and set interrupts for PCI devices and to configure
the master latency timer value for the server.
– Integrated System Management Processor Settings
You can view and enable or disable the Reboot on System NMI setting on
this menu. If this setting is enabled, the server will automatically restart 60
seconds after the service processor issues an Non-maskable interrupt (NMI)
to the server. If this setting is disabled, the server will not restart. The default
value is Enable.
v Error Logs
Select this choice to view or clear error logs.
– Select POST Error Log to view the three most recent error codes and
messages that the system generated during POST.
18
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Select Clear event/error logs from the POST Error Log menu to clear the
POST Error Log.
– Select System Event/Error Log to view the System Event/Error Log. The
System Event/Error Log contains all the system error and warning messages
that the system has generated. You can use the arrow keys to move between
pages in the System Event/Error Log.
Select Clear event/error logs from the System Event/Error Log menu to
clear the System Event/Error Log.
v Save Settings
Select this choice to save your customized settings.
v Restore Settings
Select this choice to delete your changes.
v Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel your changes.
v Exit Setup
If you have made any changes and not saved them, the program will prompt you
to save the changes or exit without saving the changes.
Additional Configuration/Setup Utility menu choices
When you install an IBM Remote Supervisor Adapter in your server, you can view
additional menu choices in the Configuration/Setup Utility program, such as:
v System Card Data
Select this choice to display information about your server.
v PCI Slot/Device Information
Select this choice to view the properties of adapters installed in PCI slots.
v Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change the administrator password.
v Remote Control Security Settings
Select this choice to set a remote-control password. When you set a
remote-control password, you can also set the number of failed attempts to enter
the correct remote-control password, and the duration before another attempt is
allowed.
For a list of supported options for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World Wide Web. To order an optional
Remote Supervisor Adapter, contact your IBM Reseller or an IBM marketing
representative.
Using passwords
The System Security choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
menu. After you select this choice, you can implement two levels of password
protection: power-on password and administrator password. The administrator
password is available only if the optional IBM Remote Supervisor Adapter is
installed in your server.
Power-on password
After you set a power-on password, you can enable the Unattended Start mode.
This locks the keyboard and mouse but enables the operating system to start. The
keyboard and mouse remain locked until you type the correct password.
Chapter 2. Configuration
19
You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for
your power-on password. Keep a record of your password in a secure place. When
a power-on password is set, POST is not completed until you type the password. If
you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server through one
of the following methods:
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the
power-on prompt. (If necessary, see “Administrator password” for details.) Start
the Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the power-on password.
v Remove the battery and then reinstall the battery (see “Replacing the battery” on
page 97).
v Change the position of the power-on password override switch (switch 6 on
switch block 1) as described below to bypass the power-on password check. You
can then start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the power-on
password.
Notes:
1. Before changing any switch settings or moving any jumpers, turn off the
server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables.
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the
illustrations in this book are reserved.
Power-on password override (switch 6)
Changing the position of this switch bypasses the power-on password
check the next time the server is powered on. You do not need to move
the switch back after the password is overridden. The default position is
Off. To bypass the power-on password check, move the switch to the
opposite position. Changing the position of this switch does not affect the
administrator password check if an administrator password is set.
Administrator password
Select this choice to set an administrator password. The administrator password
provides access to all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You
can set, change, or delete both the administrator and power-on passwords and
allow a power-on password to be changed by the user. You can use any
combination of up to seven characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your administrator
password. Keep a record of your password in a secure place. The administrator
password is available only if the optional IBM Remote Supervisor Adapter is
installed in your server.
Attention: If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be
overridden or removed. You must replace the system board.
The following table provides a summary of the password features.
Table 2. Power-on and administrator password features
20
Type of password
Features
Power-on password
v Type the password to complete the system startup.
v All choices are available on the Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
Administrator password
v No password is required to complete the system startup.
v Type the password to access the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
v All choices are available on the Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 2. Power-on and administrator password features (continued)
Type of password
Features
Administrator and
power-on password
v You can type either password to complete the system startup.
v The administrator password provides access to all choices on
the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You can set,
change, or delete both the administrator and power-on
passwords and allow a power-on password to be changed by
the user.
v The power-on password provides access to a limited set of
choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. This
limited access might include changing or deleting the power-on
password.
Using the LSI Logic Configuration Utility program
LSI Logic Configuration is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program that
you can use to:
v Perform a low-level format of a SCSI hard disk drive
v Set a SCSI device scan order
v Set a SCSI ID for a controller
Notes:
1. The integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities in your server supports
only RAID level-1 and RAID level-1 Enhanced (RAID level-1E). Installing an
optional ServeRAID-5i controller provides additional RAID levels. However, if a
ServeRAID-5i controller is installed and later removed, you must re-enable the
on-board SCSI controller in using the Configuration/Setup Utility program (see
“Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15). See “Using
ServeRAID Manager” on page 25 for information on configuring your server for
RAID operation.
2. If you install a different type of RAID adapter in your server, use the
configuration method supplied with the RAID adapter to view or change SCSI
settings for attached devices.
The following sections provide the instructions needed to start the LSI Logic
Configuration Utility program and to format a SCSI hard disk drive.
Starting the LSI Logic Configuration Utility program
Complete the following steps to start the LSI Logic Configuration Utility program:
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the <<< Press <CTRL><C> to start LSI Logic Configuration Utility
>>> prompt appears, press Ctrl+C.
Note: If an administrator password has been set, you are prompted to type the
password to start the LSI Logic Configuration Utility program.
3. Use the arrow keys to select a controller (channel) from the list of adapters;
then, press Enter.
4. Follow the instructions on the resulting screen to change the settings of the
selected items; then, press Enter. The Device Properties and Mirroring
Properties choices produce additional screens of parameters to review or
change.
Chapter 2. Configuration
21
Formatting a SCSI hard disk drive
You can use the LSI Logic Configuration Utility program to perform a low-level
format on a SCSI hard disk drive. Complete the following steps to format a drive:
1. Select the controller channel for the drive to format from the list of adapters.
2. Select Device Properties from the resulting screen.
3. Use the arrow keys (↑ or ↓) to highlight the drive to format.
4. Use the arrow keys (← or →) or the End key to scroll to the right.
5. Highlight the Format item; then, press Enter to begin the low-level formatting
operation.
Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD includes an easy-to-use setup and
installation program that is designed for your IBM server. The ServerGuide program
detects the server model and hardware options that are installed and uses that
information during setup to configure the hardware. The ServerGuide program
simplifies operating-system installations by providing updated device drivers and, in
some cases, installing them automatically.
If a later version of the ServerGuide program is available, you can download a free
image of the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, or you can purchase the CD.
To download the image, go to the IBM ServerGuide Web page at
http://www.ibm.com/pc/qtechinfo/MIGR-4ZKPPT.html. To purchase the latest
ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, go to the ServerGuide fulfillment Web site
at http://www.ibm.com/pc/coupon/.
The ServerGuide program has the following features to make setup easier:
v An easy-to-use interface with online help
v Diskette-free setup, and configuration programs that are based on detected
hardware
v ServeRAID Manager program, which configures your ServeRAID adapter or
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities
v A system BIOS code update program, which updates the BIOS code directly from
the CD
v Device drivers that are provided for your server model and detected hardware
v Operating-system partition size and file-system type that are selectable during
setup
ServerGuide features
Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the ServerGuide
program. To learn more about the version that you have, start the ServerGuide
Setup and Installation CD and view the online overview. Not all features are
supported on all server models.
The ServerGuide program requires a supported IBM server with an enabled
startable (bootable) CD-ROM drive. In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and
Installation CD, you must have your operating-system CD to install your operating
system.
The ServerGuide program has the following features:
v Sets system date and time.
22
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Detects the SCSI RAID adapter, controller, or integrated SCSI controller with
RAID capabilities and runs the SCSI RAID configuration program.
v Updates the licensed internal code (firmware) level without diskettes.
v Checks the system BIOS code and microcode (firmware) levels of supported
options to determine whether a later level is available from the CD. You can
perform updates without using diskettes.
v Creates a System Partition on the default drive. You can run server-specific utility
programs after setup.
v Detects installed hardware options and provides updated device drivers for most
adapters and devices.
v Creates a setup-replication diskette for replicating setup selections for other
servers of the same model.
v Provides diskette-free installation for supported operating systems.
v Provides a replicated installation path for multiple installations of supported
operating systems.
v Includes an online README file with links to tips for your hardware and
operating-system installation.
Setup and configuration overview
When you use the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you do not need setup
diskettes. You can use the CD to configure any supported IBM server model. The
ServerGuide program checks your system BIOS, service processors, and other
system hardware to determine if system updates are available. The setup program
provides a list of tasks that are required to set up your server model. On a server
with a ServeRAID adapter or integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities, you
can run the SCSI RAID configuration program to create logical drives.
Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
When you start the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, the program performs
the following tasks:
v The ServerGuide program prompts you for your language, country, and keyboard
layout. (This information is stored and later passed to the operating-system
installation program.)
v The ServerGuide program displays choices for running the configuration
programs. For example:
– The Express Configuration method runs the required programs for your
server, based on the hardware that is detected.
– The Custom Configuration method displays all programs that are available for
your server, and you decide which programs to run.
– The Replicated Configuration method provides the option of duplicating your
setup selections to other servers that are the same model.
v If you select the Custom Configuration method, the following features are
optional. If you select the Express Configuration method, some or all of these
features are run, depending on the hardware that is detected:
– The Set Date and Time feature is provided so that you do not have to use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to access these settings.
– The Clear Hard Disks feature is provided so you can delete all partitions on all
hard disk drives.
– The ServerGuide program checks the server BIOS code and microcode
(firmware) levels for supported options and then checks the CD for a newer
level. The CD content might be newer than the BIOS code and firmware level.
Chapter 2. Configuration
23
The ServerGuide program can perform a flash update of the BIOS code and
supported microcode (firmware) options without using diskettes.
– The SCSI RAID configuration program starts, leading you through the entire
configuration process.
– The ServerGuide program creates a System Partition on the default drive.
v The ServerGuide program displays a confirmation summary, so that you will
know when you have completed all the required tasks. Then, you are ready to
install your operating system.
Notes:
1. Plug and Play adapters are configured automatically. Non-Plug and Play
adapters or non-IBM adapters might require switch settings, additional device
drivers, and installation after the operating system is installed. See the
documentation that comes with the adapter.
2. Diagnostics for your server come in BIOS code or on a separate diagnostics
CD.
System Partition
The ServerGuide program creates a 50 MB System Partition on the default drive.
The System Partition contains server-specific utility programs such as
service-processor disk operating system (DOS) utilities, system diagnostics, flash
BIOS updates, and other programs. Programs in the System Partition vary by
server model, and not all server models run utility programs from the System
Partition. To determine which ones do, start the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD and view the online overview.
After setup is complete, you can access programs in the System Partition by
restarting the server and pressing Alt+F1 when the prompt is displayed. The
System Partition menu displays the programs that are available on your server
model.
Typical operating-system installation
You can use the ServerGuide program to shorten your installation time. The
ServerGuide program provides the device drivers that are required for your
hardware and for the operating system that you are installing. This section
describes a typical ServerGuide operating-system installation.
Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
1. After you have completed the setup process, the operating-system installation
program starts. (You will need your operating-system CD to complete the
installation.)
2. The ServerGuide program stores information about the server model, service
processor, hard disk drive controllers, and network adapters. Then, the program
checks the CD for newer device drivers. This information is stored and then
passed to the operating-system installation program.
3. With some operating-system installations, you can create an operating-system
replication diskette for setting up additional servers. This diskette contains the
Internet protocol (IP) address, server name, and other selections.
4. The ServerGuide program presents operating-system partition options that are
based on your operating-system selection and the installed hard disk drives.
24
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
5. If you are installing the operating system from diskettes, the ServerGuide
program lists the diskettes that you must create and the optional device-driver
diskettes (for installed adapters or controllers) that you might want to create.
6. The ServerGuide program prompts you to insert your operating-system CD and
restart the server. At this point, the installation program for the operating system
takes control to complete the installation.
Setting up or updating multiple servers
You can use the ServerGuide program to create diskettes that help you set up or
update multiple servers. You can modify information on the diskettes as you use
them to set up or update other servers.
Note: Availability and function can vary by server model and by the hardware that
is installed.
You can create a setup-replication diskette, which contains your hardware
configuration selections. Use this diskette to replicate selections to other servers
that are of the same model.
You can create an operating-system replication diskette, which contains information
that you need to complete multiple installations. Not all operating systems support
operating-system replication diskettes.
Installing your operating system without ServerGuide
If you have already configured the server hardware and you decide not to use the
ServerGuide program to install your operating system, complete the following steps
to download the latest operating-system installation instructions from the IBM
Support Web page:
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/.
2. Under Browse, click Servers.
3. From the Family drop-down list, select your server model.
4. If operating-system installation instructions are available for your server model,
OS installation is in the list in the upper-left corner of the Web page. Click OS
installation and select the instructions for your operating system.
Using ServeRAID Manager
You can use the ServeRAID Manager program, provided on the IBM ServeRAID
Support CD, to:
v Configure a redundant array of independent disks (RAID)
v Restore a SCSI hard disk to factory-default settings, erasing all data
v View your RAID configuration and associated devices
v Monitor operation of your RAID controllers
The ServeRAID Manager program operates in two ways:
v Startable-CD mode
v As an installed software program
See the ServeRAID documentation on the IBM ServeRAID Support CD for
additional information about RAID technology and instructions for using ServeRAID
Chapter 2. Configuration
25
Manager. The Installation Guide for your server also contains instructions for using
ServeRAID Manager to configure your integrated SCSI controller with RAID
capabilities.
Notes:
1. The integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities in your server supports
only RAID level-1 and RAID level-1 Enhanced (RAID level-1E). Installing an
optional ServeRAID-5i controller provides additional RAID levels. However, if a
ServeRAID-5i controller is installed and later removed, you must re-enable the
on-board SCSI controller in using the Configuration/Setup Utility program (see
“Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15).
2. If you install a different type of RAID adapter in your server, use the
configuration method supplied with the RAID adapter to view or change SCSI
settings for attached devices.
Before you install your operating system, you must configure the controller that is
attached to the hard disk drives. You must use the configuration program on the
IBM ServeRAID Support CD to configure the integrated SCSI controller with RAID
capabilities or to configure an optional IBM ServeRAID controller.
Notes:
1. You cannot use the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD to configure the
optional controllers.
2. To update the firmware and BIOS for an optional ServeRAID controller, you
must use the IBM ServeRAID Support CD that comes with the ServeRAID
option.
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller
The Ethernet controller is integrated on the system board. This controller provides
an interface for connecting to 10-Mbps, 100-Mbps, or 1000-Mbps networks and
provides full duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and
reception of data on the Ethernet local area network (LAN). You do not need to set
any jumpers or configure the controller for your operating system before you use
the Ethernet controller. However, you must install a device driver to enable your
operating system to address the Ethernet controller. The device drivers are provided
on the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD.
When you connect your server to the network, the Ethernet controller automatically
detects the data-transfer rate (10-Mbps, 100-Mbps, or 1000-Mbps) on the network
and then sets the controller to operate at the appropriate rate. In addition, if the
Ethernet ports that your server is connected to support auto-negotiation, the Gigabit
Ethernet controller will set the appropriate duplex state. That is, the Ethernet
controller will adjust to the network data rate, whether the data rate is standard
Ethernet (10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T), half duplex
(HDX), or full duplex (FDX). The controller supports half-duplex (HDX) and
full-duplex (FDX) modes at both speeds.
For updated information on configuring your Ethernet controller, go to the IBM
Support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/pc/support and navigate to the area for
your specific server type. From this area you can download documentation, the
most current device drivers for your server, and software that supports advanced
networking functions. After downloading, run the downloaded program launch.exe.
26
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
High-performance Ethernet modes
Your Ethernet controller supports optional modes, such as teaming, priority packets,
load balancing, fault tolerance, and virtual LANs, which provide higher performance,
security, and throughput for your server. These modes apply to the integrated
Ethernet controller and to the controllers on supported Ethernet adapters.
Ethernet port connector
The following illustration shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45
connector. These assignments apply to both 10BASE-T and 100/1000BASE-TX
devices.
8
1
Updating the integrated system management firmware
To update the integrated system management (ISM) firmware for the integrated
system management processor (ISMP), download the Integrated System
Management Firmware Update Utility program for your server from the IBM Support
Web site at http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/. Then run the Integrated System
Management Firmware Update Utility program to create a diskette to use to update
the ISM firmware. This diskette updates the ISM firmware only and does not affect
any device drivers.
Complete the following steps to update the ISM firmware:
1. Turn off your server.
2. Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
3. Turn on your server. If your server does not start from the diskette drive, use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to configure the diskette drive as a startup
device. See “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15. Then,
start again at step 1
4. From the main menu, select Update System Management Firmware and
press Enter.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.
If there is an error in updating the ISM firmware, try installing it again.
Chapter 2. Configuration
27
28
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
This section provides basic troubleshooting information to help you resolve some
common problems that might occur with your server.
If you cannot locate and correct the problem using the information in this section,
see Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance”, on page 167 for more
information.
General checkout
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradeable read-only memory
(ROM) on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the
major components of the server: the system board, Ethernet controller, video
controller, RAM, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), diskette drive, serial ports, and
hard disk drives. You can also use the diagnostic programs to test some external
devices. See “Diagnostic programs and error messages” on page 33.
If you cannot determine whether a problem is caused by the hardware or by the
software, you can run the diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause several error
messages. When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the first error message.
After the cause of the first error message is corrected, the other error messages
might not occur the next time you run the test.
A failed system might be part of a shared DASD cluster (two or more systems
sharing one or more external storage devices). Before you run diagnostics, verify
that the failing system is not part of a shared DASD cluster.
A system might be part of a cluster if:
v The system is identified as part of a cluster.
v One or more external storage units are attached to the system and at least one
of the attached storage units is also attached to another system or unidentifiable
source.
v One or more systems are located near the failing system.
If the failing system is suspected to be part of a shared DASD cluster, you can run
all diagnostic tests except the diagnostic tests that test the storage unit (DASD
residing in the storage unit) or the storage adapter attached to the storage unit.
Notes:
1. For systems that are part of a shared DASD cluster, run one test at a time in
looped mode. Do not run all tests in looped mode, because this could enable
the DASD diagnostic tests.
2. If multiple error codes are displayed, diagnose the first error code that is
displayed.
3. If the computer stops with a POST error, go to “POST error codes” on page 147.
4. If the computer stops and no error is displayed, go to “Undetermined problems”
on page 157.
5. For power supply problems, see “Power-supply LED errors” on page 146.
6. For safety information, see “Safety information” on page 169.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
29
7. For intermittent problems, check the error log.
001
IS THE SYSTEM PART OF A CLUSTER?
YES. Schedule maintenance for the system. Shut down all systems related
to the cluster. Run the storage test.
NO. Go to step 002.
002
IF THE SYSTEM IS NOT PART OF A CLUSTER:
1. Turn off the server and all external devices.
2. Check all cables and power cords.
3. Set all display controls to the middle position.
4. Turn on all external devices.
5. Turn on the server.
6. Record any POST error messages that are displayed on the screen. If
an error is displayed, look up the first error in the “POST error codes”
on page 147.
7. Check the information LED panel System Error LED; if it is on, see
“Diagnostic panel system error LED” on page 132.
8. Check the System Error log. If an error was recorded by the system,
see Chapter 6, “Symptom-to-FRU index”, on page 129.
9. Start the diagnostic programs.
10. Check for the following responses:
v One beep.
v Readable instructions or the main menu.
003
DID YOU RECEIVE BOTH OF THE CORRECT RESPONSES?
NO. Find the failure symptom in Chapter 6, “Symptom-to-FRU index”, on
page 129.
YES. Run the diagnostic programs. If necessary, see “Diagnostic programs
and error messages” on page 33.
If you receive an error, see Chapter 6, “Symptom-to-FRU index”, on
page 129.
If the diagnostic programs were completed successfully and you still
suspect a problem, see “Undetermined problems” on page 157.
30
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Diagnostic tools overview
The following tools are available to help you identify and resolve hardware-related
problems:
v POST beep codes and error messages
The power-on self-test (POST) generates beep codes and messages to indicate
successful test completion or the detection of a problem. See “POST error logs”
for more information.
v Error log
The POST error log contains the three most recent error codes and messages
that the system has generated during POST. The System Error Log contains all
the error messages that were issued during POST.
To view the contents of the error logs, start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program; then, select Error Logs from the main menu. See “Viewing the System
Error log” on page 35 for more information.
v ServerGuide error symptoms
ServerGuide error symptoms are explained at “ServerGuide error symptoms” on
page 32.
v SCSI error messages
For information on SCSI errors, see “Small computer system interface messages”
on page 33 and “SCSI error codes” on page 153.
v Diagnostic programs and error messages
The server diagnostic programs are stored in read-only memory (ROM) on the
system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of your server. See “Diagnostic programs and error messages” on
page 33 for more information.
v Light Path Diagnostics
Your server has light-emitting diodes (LEDs) to help you identify problems with
server components. These LEDs are part of the Light Path Diagnostics that are
built into your server. By following the path of LEDs, you can quickly identify the
type of system error that occurred. See “Light Path Diagnostics” on page 38 for
more information.
v Error symptom charts
These charts list problem symptoms, along with suggested steps to correct the
problems. See the “Error symptoms” on page 139 for more information.
v Support
You can find service information for your IBM products, including supported
options, at http://www.ibm.com/pc/support.
POST error logs
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
server components and some of the options installed in the server. This series of
tests is called the power-on self-test, or POST.
If POST finishes without detecting any problems, a single beep sounds, and the first
screen of your operating system or application program appears.
If POST detects a problem, more than one beep sounds, and an error message
appears on your screen. See “Beep symptoms” on page 129 and “POST error
codes” on page 147 for more information.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
31
Notes:
1. If you have a power-on password or administrator password set, you must type
the password and press Enter, when prompted, before POST will continue.
2. A single problem might cause several error messages. When this occurs, work
to correct the cause of the first error message. After you correct the cause of
the first error message, the other error messages usually will not occur the next
time you run the test.
The POST error log contains the three most recent error codes and messages that
the system generated during POST. The System Error log contains all messages
issued during POST and all system status messages from the service processor.
You can view the contents of the System Error log from the Configuration/Setup
Utility program or from the diagnostic programs.
Viewing error logs from the Configuration/Setup Utility program
Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program; then, select Error Logs from the main
menu. See “Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15 for more
information.
Viewing error logs from the diagnostic programs
Start the diagnostic programs; select Hardware Info from the top of the diagnostic
programs screen; select System Error Log from the list that appears; then, follow
the instructions on the screen. See “Starting the diagnostic programs” on page 34
for more information.
ServerGuide error symptoms
Look for the symptom in the left column of the chart. Probable solutions to the
problem are in the right column.
Table 3. ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
Symptom
Suggested action
The ServerGuide
Setup and
Installation CD will
not start.
v Ensure that the server is supported and has a startable (bootable)
CD-ROM drive.
v If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been altered, ensure
that the CD-ROM drive is first in the startup sequence.
v If more than one CD-ROM drive is installed, ensure that only one
drive is set as the primary drive. Start the CD from the primary
drive.
The SCSI RAID
v Ensure that there are no duplicate SCSI IDs or IRQ assignments.
program cannot
v Ensure that the hard disk drive is connected properly.
view all installed
drives, or the NOS
cannot be installed.
The Operating
System Installation
program
continuously loops.
Make more space available on the hard disk.
The ServerGuide
Ensure that the NOS CD you have is supported by the ServerGuide
program will not
program. See the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD label for a
start your NOS CD. list of supported NOS versions.
32
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 3. ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD (continued)
Symptom
Suggested action
The NOS cannot
be installed; the
option is not
available.
Ensure that the NOS is supported on your server. If the NOS is
supported, either there is no logical drive defined (SCSI RAID
systems) or the ServerGuide System Partition is not present. Run the
ServerGuide program, and ensure that setup is complete.
Small computer system interface messages
If you receive a SCSI error message, see “SCSI error codes” on page 153.
Note: If your server does not have a hard disk drive, ignore any message that
indicates that the BIOS is not installed.
Diagnostic programs and error messages
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradeable read-only memory
(ROM) on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the
major components of your server.
Diagnostic error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to
be used to identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex
problems that are indicated by error messages should be performed by trained
service personnel.
Sometimes the first error to occur causes additional errors. In this case, the server
displays more than one error message. Always follow the suggested action
instructions for the first error message that appears.
The following sections contain the error codes that might appear in the detailed test
log and summary log when the diagnostic programs are run.
The error code format is as follows:
fff-ttt-iii-date-cc-text message
where:
fff
is the three-digit function code that indicates the function being
tested when the error occurred. For example, function code 089 is
for the microprocessor.
ttt
is the three-digit failure code that indicates the exact test failure that
was encountered. (These codes are for trained service personnel;
see “Diagnostic error codes” on page 134).
iii
is the three-digit device ID. (These codes are for trained service
personnel; see “Diagnostic error codes” on page 134).
date
is the date that the diagnostic test was run and the error recorded.
cc
is the check value that is used to verify the validity of the
information.
text message is the diagnostic message that indicates the reason for the problem.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
33
Text messages
The diagnostic text message format is as follows:
Function Name: Result (test specific string)
where:
Function Name
is the name of the function being tested when the error occurred. This
corresponds to the function code (fff) shown in the error code format in the
previous section.
Result
can be one of the following:
Passed
This result occurs when the diagnostic test
is completed without any errors.
Failed
This result occurs when the diagnostic test
discovers an error.
User Aborted
This result occurs when you stop the
diagnostic test before it is complete.
Not Applicable
This result occurs when you specify a
diagnostic test for a device that is not
present.
Aborted
This result occurs when the test could not
proceed, for example, because of the
system configuration.
Warning
This result occurs when a possible problem
is reported during the diagnostic test, such
as when a device driver is not found.
test specific string
is additional information that you can use to analyze the problem.
Starting the diagnostic programs
Complete the following steps to start the diagnostic programs:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Note: To run the diagnostic programs, you must start the server with the
highest level password that is set. That is, if an administrator password is
set, you must enter the administrator password, not the power-on
password, to run the diagnostic programs.
When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.
Type the appropriate password; then, press Enter.
Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the screen.
When the Diagnostic Programs screen appears, select the test you want to run
from the list that appears; then, follow the instructions on the screen.
Notes:
a. You can press F1 while running the diagnostic programs to obtain help
information. You also can press F1 from within a help screen to obtain
online documentation from which you can select different categories. To exit
from the help information and return to where you left off, press Esc.
34
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
b. If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server
and try running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains,
replace the component that was being tested when the server stopped.
c. The keyboard and mouse (pointing device) tests assume that a keyboard
and mouse are attached to the server.
d. If you run the diagnostic programs with either no mouse or a USB mouse
attached to your server, you will not be able to navigate between test
categories using the Next Cat and Prev Cat buttons. All other functions
provided by mouse-selectable buttons are also available using the function
keys.
e. You can test the USB keyboard by using the regular keyboard test. The
regular mouse test can test a USB mouse. Also, you can run the USB
interface test only if there are no USB devices attached.
f. You can view server configuration information (such as system configuration,
memory contents, interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory access (DMA)
use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting Hardware Info from the top of
the screen.
If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem
persists during normal server operations, a software error might be the cause. If
you suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with the software
package.
Viewing the test log
When the tests are completed, you can view the test log by selecting Utility from
the top of the screen and then selecting View Test Log.
Notes:
1. You can view the test log only while you are in the diagnostic programs. When
you exit the diagnostic programs, the test log is cleared (saved test logs are not
affected). To save the test log so that you can view it later, click Save Log on
the diagnostic programs screen and specify a location and name for the saved
log file.
2. To save the test log to a diskette, you must use a diskette that you have
formatted yourself; this function does not work with preformatted diskettes. If the
diskette has sufficient space for the test log, the diskette may contain other
data.
Viewing the System Error log
You can also view the System Error log from the diagnostic programs. See the
instructions in “POST error logs” on page 31.
Diagnostic error message tables
For descriptions of the error messages that might appear when you run the
diagnostic programs, see “Diagnostic error codes” on page 134.
Notes:
1. Depending on your server configuration, some of the error messages might not
appear when you run the diagnostic programs.
2. If diagnostic error messages appear that are not listed in the tables, make sure
that your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management
Processor, ServeRAID, and diagnostics microcode installed.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
35
Identifying problems using status LEDs
If the system-error LED in the operator information panel on the front of the server
is on, one or more LEDs inside the server or on the power supplies will be on. Your
server has LEDs to help you identify problems with some server components.
These LEDs are part of the Light Path Diagnostics feature built into the server. By
following the path of LEDs, you can quickly identify the type of system error that
occurred (see “Light Path Diagnostics” on page 38).
Your server is designed so that any LEDs that are illuminated remain illuminated
when the server shuts down, provided that the ac power source is good and the
power supplies can supply +5 V dc current to the server. This feature helps you
isolate the problem if an error causes the server to shut down. See “System-board
LED locations” on page 53.
LEDs for Active PCI slots
Each Active™ (hot-plug) PCI slot has three LEDs associated with it: one power LED
and two attention LEDs. The following illustration shows the location of these LEDs.
PCI bus A error
LED (CR66)
PCI-X bus B error
LED (CR68)
PCI-X slot 5 power
LED (CR75)
PCI-X slot 5 internal
attention LED (CR73)
PCI-X slot 5 external
attention LED (CR74)
PCI-X bus C error
LED (CR76)
PCI-X slot 6 external
attention LED (CR77)
PCI-X slot 6 internal
attention LED (CR78)
PCI-X slot 6 power
LED (CR79)
Power LED
This LED is on when the hot-plug PCI slot has power. An adapter must not
be added to or removed from the PCI slot when the power LED is on.
When this LED is off, the hot-plug PCI slot has no power applied. An
adapter can be added to or removed from the PCI slot when the power
LED is off.
36
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
See your operating-system documentation to determine if your operating
system supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if so, how to disable the
hot-plug PCI slot.
Attention LEDs
Each hot-plug PCI slot has an attention LED that is visible from the rear of
the server and one that can be seen from inside the server. These LEDs
have the same meaning; they are duplicated to be visible from outside or
inside the server.
An attention LED flashes approximately once per second when it is on. The
meaning of the attention LEDs is defined by your operating system. See
your operating-system documentation to determine if your operating system
supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if so, what the attention LEDs indicate.
The following table describes the adapter power and attention LEDs.
Table 4. Adapter power and attention LEDs
Power LED
Attention LED
Description and action
On
Flashing
The adapter requires attention. The slot still has power
applied. Do not remove or install an adapter in the
slot. See your operating-system documentation for
instructions.
On
Off
Normal operation; no intervention is required.
Off
Flashing
The adapter requires intervention. Power is removed
from the slot. An adapter can be removed or installed
in the slot.
Off
Off
Power is removed from the slot. An adapter can be
removed or installed in the slot.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
37
Power-supply LEDs
The ac and dc power LEDs on the power supply provide status information about
the power supply. The following illustration shows the location of the ac and dc
power LEDs.
Note: The following illustration shows the rear of the server with two hot-swap
power supplies installed. A server with a single fixed power supply is similar.
Fan 1 LED
Power supply 1
Fan 2 LED
AC power LED
(green)
DC power LED
(green)
Ethernet link
status LED
Power supply 2
AC power LED
(green)
PCI-X slot 5
attention LED
2
1
DC power LED
(green)
PCI-X slot 6
attention LED
NMI button
(service use only)
For more information about the ac and dc power LEDs, see “Power-supply LED
errors” on page 146.
Light Path Diagnostics
If the system error LED in the operator information panel on the front of the server
is on, one or more LEDs inside the server might be on. Use the Light Path
Diagnostics panel to quickly identify the type of error that occurred.
For LED locations, see “System-board LED locations” on page 53.
Your server is designed so that LEDs remain lit when the server shuts down,
provided that the power supplies are operating properly. This feature helps you to
isolate the problem even if an error causes the server to shut down.
38
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Diagnostic panel LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the diagnostics panel inside the server.
REMIND
CPU
VRM
DASD
MEMORY
NMI
PCI BUS
SERVICE
PROCESSOR BUS
1
NONREDUNDANT
2
POWER SUPPLY
FAN
TEMPERATURE
The system-error LED on the operator information panel is lit when certain system
errors occur. If the system-error LED on your server is lit, you can check the
diagnostics panel to see if any LEDs are lit. You can determine the cause of the
error and the action you should take by checking the table at “Diagnostic panel
system error LED” on page 132.
Notes:
1. Depending on your server model, these items might appear in a different
orientation on the LED panel.
2. The server supports a maximum of three PCI buses.
3. See the documentation that comes with the system-management software for
more information about the service processor.
Remind button
You can use the Remind button to place the front panel system-error LED into the
Remind mode. By pressing the button, you acknowledge the failure but indicate that
you will not take immediate action. If a new failure occurs, the system-error LED will
turn on again.
In the Remind mode, the system-error LED flashes every 2 seconds. The
system-error LED remains in the Remind mode until one of the following situations
occurs:
v All known problems are resolved
v The system is restarted
v A new problem occurs
You can use the Remind button to delay server maintenance until a later time. Also,
resetting the system-error LED enables the LED to react to another error. If the LED
is still on from the first error, it will not indicate additional errors. If you press the
Remind button (causing the LED to flash every 2 seconds) and another error
occurs, the LED will stop flashing and will instead be lit continuously to alert you to
the new error.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
39
Recovering the BIOS code
If the BIOS code has become damaged, such as from a power failure during a flash
update, you can recover the BIOS code using a BIOS flash diskette.
Note: You can obtain a BIOS flash diskette from one of the following sources:
v Use the ServerGuide program to make a BIOS flash diskette.
v Download a BIOS flash diskette from the World Wide Web. Go to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/, click IBM Server Support, and make the
selections for your server.
v Contact your IBM service representative.
Complete the following steps to recover the BIOS code:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables; then,
remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
2. Locate the boot block recovery jumper (J28) on the system board. See
“System-board switches and jumpers” on page 51 for jumper location.
3. Remove the jumper from pins 1 and 2 of boot block recovery jumper and place
it on pins 2 and 3 of the boot block recovery jumper to enable BIOS recovery
mode.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Insert the BIOS flash diskette into the diskette drive.
Reconnect all power cords; then, reinstall the server cover.
Restart the server. The system begins the power-on self-test (POST).
Select 1 - Update POST/BIOS from the menu that contains various flash
(update) options.
8. When prompted as to whether you want to save the current code to a diskette,
press N.
9. When prompted to choose a language, select a language (from 0 to 7) and
press Enter to accept your choice.
10. Do not restart your server at this time.
11. Remove the BIOS flash diskette from the diskette drive.
12. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords; then, remove the server
cover.
13. Remove the jumper from pins 2 and 3 of boot block recovery jumper (J28) and
place it on pins 1 and 2 of the boot block recovery jumper to return to normal
startup mode.
14. Reconnect all external cables and power cords and turn on the peripheral
devices; then, reinstall the server cover and restart the server. The system
starts.
Power checkout
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually a short circuit will cause
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition.
A general procedure for troubleshooting power problems is as follows:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
example, if there is a loose screw causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
40
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
3. Remove adapters and disconnect the cables and power connectors to all
internal and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration
required to start the server (see “Minimum operating requirements” on page
157).
4. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts up
successfully, replace adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated. If the server does not start up from the minimal configuration, replace
FRUs of minimal configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.
To use this method, it is important to know the minimum configuration required for a
system to start (see page 157). For specific problems, see “Power-supply LED
errors” on page 146.
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller
This section provides troubleshooting information for problems that might occur with
the 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet controller.
Network connection problems
If the Ethernet controller cannot connect to the network, check the following
conditions:
v Make sure that the cable is installed correctly.
The network cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.
If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at either 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps,
you must use Category 5 or higher cabling.
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and
duplex mode of the hub.
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the operator information panel and on the
rear of the server.
v
v
v
v
These LEDs indicate whether a problem exists with the connector, cable, or hub.
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED, on the operator information panel,
is lit when the Ethernet controller sends or receives data over the Ethernet
Network. If the Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is off, make sure that
the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers are
installed.
– The Ethernet link status LED, on the rear of the server, is lit when the
Ethernet controller receives a LINK pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there
might be a defective connector or cable or a problem with the hub.
Make sure that you are using the correct device drivers which are supplied with
your server.
Check for operating-system-specific causes for the problem.
Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.
Test the Ethernet controller.
The way the Ethernet controller is tested depends on which operating system
you are using (see the Ethernet controller device driver README files).
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart
Use the following troubleshooting chart to find solutions to 10/100/1000 Mbps
Ethernet controller problems that have definite symptoms.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
41
Table 5. Ethernet troubleshooting chart
Ethernet controller
problem
FRU/actions
The server stops
running when loading
device drivers.
The PCI BIOS interrupt settings are incorrect.
Check the following:
v Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet controller is also
assigned to another device in the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some devices do not function well
when they share an interrupt with a dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ
assigned to the Ethernet controller or the other device. For example, for NetWare
Versions 3 and 4, it is recommended that disk controllers not share interrupts with LAN
controllers.
v Make sure that you are using the most recent device driver available from the World
Wide Web.
v Run the network diagnostic program.
v Reseat or replace the adapter.
Ethernet link status LED Check the following:
does not work.
v Make sure that the hub is turned on.
v Check all connections at the Ethernet controller and the hub.
v Use another port on the hub.
v If the hub does not support auto-negotiation, manually configure the Ethernet controller
to match the hub.
v If you manually configured the Duplex mode, make sure that you also manually
configure the speed.
v Run diagnostics on the LEDs.
v Reseat or replace the adapter.
The Ethernet
transmit/receive activity
LED does not work.
Check the following:
v Make sure that you have loaded the network device drivers.
v The network might be idle. Try sending data from this server.
v Run diagnostics on the LEDs.
Data is incorrect or
sporadic.
Check the following:
v Make sure that you are using Category 5 or higher cabling when operating the server at
100 Mbps or at 1000 Mbps.
v Make sure that the cables do not run close to noise-inducing sources like fluorescent
lights.
The Ethernet controller
stopped working when
another adapter was
added to the server.
Check the following:
v Make sure that the cable is connected to the Ethernet controller.
v Make sure that your PCI system BIOS code is current.
v Reseat the adapter.
v Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet adapter is also assigned
to another device in the system. Use the Configuration/Setup Utility program to
determine if this is the case.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some devices do not function well
when they share an interrupt with a dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ
assigned to the Ethernet adapter or the other device.
v Reseat or replace the adapter.
The Ethernet controller Check the following:
stopped working without v Run diagnostics for the Ethernet controller.
apparent cause.
v Try a different connector on the hub.
v Reinstall the device drivers. See your operating-system documentation and the
ServerGuide information.
v Reseat or replace the adapter.
42
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Ethernet controller messages
The integrated Ethernet controller might display messages from certain device
drivers. The latest information available concerning these messages will be made
available at the IBM Support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/pc/support.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
43
44
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
This chapter provides instructions for adding options to your server. Some
option-removal instructions are provided in case you need to remove one option to
install another.
Installation guidelines
Before you begin to install options in your server, read the following information:
v Become familiar with the safety and handling guidelines specified under
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 46 and read the safety statements in
“Safety information” on page 169.
v You do not need to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap drives, hot-swap fans, Active PCI (hot-plug) adapters, or
hot-plug Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices.
v The orange color on components and labels in your server identifies hot-swap or
hot-plug component. You can install or remove hot-swap and hot-plug
components while the system is running, provided that your system is configured
to support this function. For complete details about installing or removing a
hot-swap or hot-plug component, see the detailed information in this chapter.
v The blue color on components and labels identifies touch points where you can
grip a component, move a latch, and so on.
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for your server, monitor, and any other options that you intend to install.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v For a list of supported options for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World Wide Web.
System reliability considerations
To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure that:
v Each of the drive bays has either a drive or a filler panel installed.
v Each of the power-supply bays has a power supply installed.
v For tower models, make sure that there is at least 50 mm (2 inches) of ventilated
space at the sides of the server and 100 mm (4 inches) at the front and rear of
the server.
For rack configurations, make sure that space is available around the server to
enable the server cooling system to work properly. See the documentation that
comes with the rack for additional information.
v The server cover is in place during normal operation.
v The air-baffle cover over the microprocessors remains closed during normal
operation.
v A removed hot-swap drive is replaced within 2 minutes of removal.
v Cables for optional adapters are routed according to the instructions provided
with the adapters.
v A failed fan is replaced within 48 hours.
v The server is turned off and the power cords are disconnected before you open
the air-baffle cover.
v The air-baffle assembly is always installed in the server except when you are
installing or removing the components that are located under the air-baffle cover.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
45
v When the air-baffle assembly is installed in the server, the air-baffle cover is
always closed.
v Microprocessor socket 2 always contains either a microprocessor baffle or a
microprocessor.
Working inside the server with the power on
Your server supports hot-plug, hot-add, and hot-swap devices and is designed to
operate safely while turned on with the cover removed. Follow these guidelines
when you work inside a server that is turned on:
v Avoid loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before
working inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working inside the
server.
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist
watches.
v Remove items from your shirt pocket (such as pens or pencils) that could fall into
the server as you lean over it.
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hair pins, or screws,
into the server.
Handling static-sensitive devices
Attention: Static electricity can damage electronic devices and your system. To
avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until
you are ready to install them.
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following
precautions:
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and possibly damage the
device.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal part of the server for at least 2 seconds. (This drains static electricity from
the package and from your body.)
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without
setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, place it back
into its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server cover or
on a metal surface.
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather because heating
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.
Major components of the xSeries 235 Type 8671 server
The orange color on components and labels in your server identifies hot-swap or
hot-plug components. You can install or remove hot-swap or hot-plug components
while the system is running, provided that your system is configured to support this
function.
46
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
The blue color on components and labels indicates touch points where a
component can be gripped, a latch moved, and so on.
The following illustration shows the major components in your server.
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
VRM
Microprocessor
Memory modules
Power supply
Rear fans
1 and 2
Center fans
3 and 4
Air-baffle
Adapter-support
bracket
Front fans
(blowers) 5 and 6
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
47
System-board component locations
This section provides illustrations of the system board showing the locations of
connectors, switch and jumper blocks, and LEDs.
System-board option connectors
The following illustration shows the location of the system-board connectors for
user-installable options.
VRM 2 (J1)
Microprocessor 2
(U9)
DIMM 1 (J7)
Microprocessor 1
(U13)
DIMM 3 (J11)
VRM 1 (J17)
DIMM 5 (J14)
DIMM 2 (J9)
DIMM 4 (J12)
DIMM 6 (J15)
Remote Supervisor
Adapter (J27)
PCI slot 1 32-bit 5.0 V
(J32)
PCI-X slot 2 64-bit 3.3 V
(J36)
PCI-X slot 3 64-bit 3.3 V
(J38)
PCI-X slot 4 64-bit 3.3 V
(J41)
PCI-X slot 5 64-bit 3.3 V
133 MHz hot-plug (J43)
PCI-X slot 6 64-bit 3.3 V
133 MHz hot-plug (J45)
Battery (BH1)
48
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
System-board internal cable connectors
The following illustration shows the internal cable connectors on the system board.
System-board identification
(some models)
533 MNz FSB
CPU ONLY
Power (J4)
Power signal (J10)
Fans (J18)
Rear fans on
533 MHz system board
Center fans on all other
system boards
IDE CD-ROM drive
(J21)
Diskette drive (J22)
Fans (J25)
Center fans on
533 MHz system board
Rear fans on all other
system boards
Light Path Diagnostics
panel (J23)
Operator information
panel (J24)
SCSI channel A
(J44)
SCSI channel B
(J51)
On/off/reset panel (J47)
Front fans (J50)
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
49
System-board external port connectors
The following illustration shows the location of the input/output external port
connectors on the system board.
Keyboard (J2)
Mouse (J3)
Parallel (J5)
Serial (J8)
RS-485 (J13)
Rear
USB (J16)
Video (J19)
Ethernet (J26)
Front USB (J29)
Optional serial
(533 MHz system board only)
(J48)
50
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
System-board switches and jumpers
The following illustration shows the location of the system-board switch block (SW1)
and jumper blocks (J28 and J42) on the system board.
Boot block recovery
jumper (J28)
3
2
1
1-2
Normal
3
2
1
2-3
Update
IXA adapter
jumper (J42)
6 7
2-3
Enabled
3 4 5
1-2
Disabled
2
1
2
3
1
OFF
1
2
3
8
System board
switch block (SW1)
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
51
Table 6 describes the function of each switch on the switch block.
Table 6. Switches 1-8
Switch
number
Default value
Switch
description
8
Off
400 MHz system board - Reserved.
533 MHz system board - Disable Wake on LAN after ac power-on.
7
Off
Power-on override. When toggled to On, this switch forces the server to turn on,
overriding the power-on button.
6
Off
Power-on password override. Changing the position of this switch bypasses the
power-on password check the next time the server is turned on and starts the
Configuration/Setup Utility program so that you can change or delete the power-on
password. You do not need to move the switch back to the default position after the
password is overridden.
Changing the position of this switch does not affect the administrator password check
if an administrator password is set.
See “Choices available from the Configuration/Setup main menu” on page 16 for
additional information about the power-on password.
5
Off
Reserved.
4
Off
Reserved.
3
Off
Reserved.
2
Off
Reserved.
1
Off
Reserved.
CAUTION:
Before changing any switch settings or moving any jumpers, turn off the
server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. (Review the
information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling static-sensitive
devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.)
Note: Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the
illustrations in this book are reserved.
52
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
System-board LED locations
The following illustration shows the location of the LEDs on the system board. You
might need to refer to this illustration when solving server problems.
VRM 2 error LED (CR1)
CPU 2 error LED (CR4)
CPU mismatch error
LED (CR14)
Power error
LED (CR15)
DIMM 1 error
LED (CR16)
PCI bus A error
LED (CR66)
PCI-X bus B error
LED (CR68)
DIMM 2 error
LED (CR17)
DIMM 3 error
LED (CR18)
DIMM 4 error
LED (CR20)
DIMM 5 error
LED (CR22)
DIMM 6 error
LED (CR23)
PCI-X slot 5 power
LED (CR75)
PCI-X slot 5 internal
attention LED (CR73)
PCI-X slot 5 external
attention LED (CR74)
PCI-X bus C error
LED (CR76)
CPU 1 error
LED (CR24)
VRM 1 error
LED (CR33)
Service processor
activity LED (CR67)
PCI-X slot 6 external
attention LED (CR77)
PCI-X slot 6 internal
attention LED (CR78)
PCI-X slot 6 power
LED (CR79)
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
53
Removing the server door (tower model)
The following illustration shows how to remove the door from the tower model
server.
Flange
PC
CP
U
VR
M
M
EM
OR
IB
Y
US
HD
D
A
B
PO
W
ER
1
SU
2
3
FA
N
PP
LY
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURV
S ICE
NO
N
1
RE
2
3
TE
M
PE
PR
OC
DU
ES
ND
AN
RAT
UR
SO
R
T
E
Server door
Complete the following steps to remove the server door:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Unlock and open the server door.
3. Locate the flange on the top edge of the door.
4. Press the flange downward while pressing outward on the door; then, lift the
door up and off the hinge. Set the door aside in a safe place.
54
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)
This section describes how to remove the left-side cover and bezel from the tower
model server.
Removing the left-side cover
The following illustration shows how to remove the left-side cover from the tower
model server.
Left-side cover
Coverrelease
latch
Complete the following steps to remove the server left-side cover:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Push the plastic cover-release latch on the front of the server to the right to
release the cover.
3. While pushing the plastic cover-release latch, slide the left-side cover slightly
toward the rear of the server; the cover will stop after approximately 25 mm (1
inch). Release the cover-release latch; then, lift the cover off the server and set
the cover aside.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
55
Removing the bezel
The following illustration shows how to remove the bezel from the tower model
server.
Note: If you have not already removed the door, remove it as described in
“Removing the server door (tower model)” on page 54.
Bezel-release lever
Complete the following steps to remove the bezel:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Press up on the bezel-release lever.
3. Pull the top of the bezel away from the chassis; then, lift the bezel to disengage
the bottom tabs.
4. Remove the bezel from the server and store the bezel in a safe place.
56
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)
This section describes how to remove the top cover and bezel from a rack
configuration server.
Removing the top cover
The following illustration shows how to remove the top cover from a rack
configuration server.
2
3
P
O
W
E
1
R
S
2
U
P
F
A
P
L
3
N
Y
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
N
O
P
N
R
O
R
C
E
E
D
S
U
S
N
O
D
R
A
N
H
D
D
T
N
IM S
IM S
E B
R U
IV S
C
E
C
P
U V
R
M
P
M
E
IC
M
B
O
A
U
R
S
Y
B
1
Top cover
Right-side
latch
Cover-release latch
Left-side latch
Complete the following steps to remove the server top cover:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Press down on the plastic cover-release latch on the front of the server.
3. While pressing the plastic cover-release latch, slide the top cover slightly toward
the rear of the server; the cover will stop after approximately 25 mm (1 inch).
Release the cover-release latch; then, lift the cover off the server and set the
cover aside.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
57
Removing the bezel
The following illustration shows how to remove the bezel from a rack configuration
server.
Bezel-release lever
Bezel
Complete the following steps to remove the bezel:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Remove the server cover and locate the bezel-release lever.
3. Press the bezel-release lever to the unlocked position as indicated on the lever.
4. Pull the right side of the bezel away from the chassis; then, slide the bezel to
the right to disengage the tabs.
5. Remove the bezel from the server and store the bezel in a safe place.
Removing and installing the adapter-support bracket
When working with some options, you must first remove the adapter-support
bracket to access certain components or connectors on the system board.
Note: The adapter-support bracket is attached to the center-fan bracket in the
server. Both brackets are removed and installed together as a single unit.
Complete the following steps to remove the adapter-support bracket:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
58
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables (“Turning
off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see “Removing the
server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or “Removing the
server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
3. Slide the air-baffle assembly out of the guides; then, remove it from the server.
Air-baffle
assembly
4. Disconnect any cables that are connected to the full-length adapters.
5. Lift the adapter-retention clip on top of the adapter-support bracket (for the
location of this clip, see the illustration at “Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 5
and 6)” on page 62); then, remove the full-length adapters and plastic dividers.
6. Disconnect the end of the cable that is attached to the center-fans connector on
the system board (see “System-board internal cable connectors” on page 49).
7. Remove the adapter-support bracket.
Centerfan
bracket
Adaptersupport
bracket
SCSI cable
Adapter-support
bracket latches
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
59
a. Press the release tab on each adapter-support bracket latch. There are two
latches; one at each end of the adapter-support bracket.
b. Slide the adapter-support bracket and fan-support bracket unit out of the
guides; then, remove it from the server.
Note: To reinstall the adapter-support bracket and other components that you
removed or disconnected, reverse the preceding steps. Remember to
reroute the cables that you disconnected and to reconnect the center-fan
cable to the system board (see “System-board internal cable connectors”
on page 49).
8. Continue with the option installation or removal procedure.
Working with adapters
This section describes how to install hot-plug and non-hot-plug PCI and PCI-X
adapters. Before you continue with the adapter-installation procedures, review
“Adapter considerations”.
The following illustration shows the location of the PCI and PCI-X adapter
expansion slots on the system board. Slots 5 and 6 are the Active PCI-X™ slots.
Active PCI-X slots are also called hot-plug PCI-X slots.
Note: For information about the adapter power-on and attention LEDs, see “LEDs
for Active PCI slots” on page 36.
PCI slot 1 32-bit 5.0 V
(J32)
PCI-X slot 2 64-bit 3.3 V
(J36)
PCI-X slot 3 64-bit 3.3 V
(J38)
PCI-X slot 4 64-bit 3.3 V
(J41)
PCI-X slot 5 64-bit 3.3V
133 MHz hot-plug (J43)
PCI-X slot 6 64-bit 3.3 V
133 MHz hot-plug (J45)
Adapter considerations
Before you install an adapter, review the following:
v Read the documentation that comes with your operating system.
60
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this chapter. If you need to change
the switch or jumper settings on your adapter, follow the instructions that come
with the adapter.
v You can install full-length adapters and non-hot-plug adapters in any expansion
slot.
v The 32-bit PCI slot supports 5.0 V signaling PCI adapters; it does not support 3.3
V signaling adapters.
v The 64-bit PCI-X slots 2 through 6 support 3.3 V signaling PCI or PCI-X
adapters; they do not support 5.0 V signaling adapters.
v The PCI bus configuration is:
– Non-hot-plug, 32-bit PCI slot 1 is on PCI bus A, 33 MHz
– Non-hot-plug, 64-bit PCI-X slots 2 and 3, and the integrated Ethernet
controller, are on PCI bus B, 100 MHz (independent of slot 4)
– Non-hot-plug, 64-bit PCI-X slot 4 and the integrated SCSI controller with RAID
capabilities are on PCI bus B, 100 MHz (independent of slots 2 and 3)
– Hot-plug, 64-bit PCI-X slot 5 is on PCI bus C, 133 MHz (independent of slot
6)
– Hot-plug, 64-bit PCI-X slot 6 is on PCI bus C, 133 MHz (independent of slot
5)
Notes:
1. PCI bus A is often referred to as bus 0; PCI bus B is often referred to as bus
1 and bus 2; and PCI bus C is often referred to as bus 3 and bus 5.
However, the bus numbers vary according to the adapters that are installed.
2. If an optional ServeRAID-5i controller is installed, it overrides the standard
functionality of the integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities and
forces PCI-X slot 4 to 66 MHz. The ServeRAID-5i controller must be installed
in slot 4 using the 3-U bracket that comes with the controller. However, if a
ServeRAID-5i controller is installed and later removed, you must re-enable
the on-board SCSI controller in using the Configuration/Setup Utility program
(see “Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15).
3. The integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities is on PCI bus B.
v The optional IBM Remote Supervisor Adapter must be installed in PCI slot 1 only.
Use the ribbon cable that comes with the adapter to connect the adapter to the
Remote Supervisor Adapter connector (J27) on the system board.
v The system scans PCI and PCI-X slots 1 through 6 to assign system resources.
The system then starts (boots) the system devices in the following order, if you
have not changed the default boot precedence: integrated SCSI controller with
RAID capabilities (or optional ServeRAID-5i controller), integrated Ethernet
controller, and then PCI and PCI-X slots 1 through 6.
Note: To change the boot precedence for PCI and PCI-X devices, start the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and select Start Options from the
main menu (see “Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on
page 15).
v The Active PCI-X slots contain:
– Power-on LEDs
– Internal attention LEDs
– External attention LEDs
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
61
Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 5 and 6)
This section contains the procedure for installing a hot-plug PCI or PCI-X adapter. If
your operating system supports hot-plug PCI or PCI-X adapters, you can replace a
failing hot-plug PCI or PCI-X adapter with a new adapter of the same type without
turning off power to the server. If your operating system and adapter also support
the hot-add feature, you can install a new adapter without turning off the power to
the server.
Notes:
1. Although an optional Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA) can be installed only in
slots 5 and 6, it is not a hot-plug adapter. See “Installing a non-hot-plug adapter
(any slot)” on page 64 for instructions for installing an IXA adapter.
2. Do not remove a hot-plug adapter before performing the operating-systemdefined procedure for disabling the Active PCI-X (hot-plug) slot that contains the
adapter. Failure to do so might cause your system to lock up. See your
operating-system documentation for additional information.
3. You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-plug adapters in the hot-plug
slots. However, you must turn off the server when performing any steps that
involve installing or removing cables.
The following illustration shows how to install a PCI or PCI-X hot-plug adapter.
Adapter-retention
latch
Expansionslot cover
Adapter
Adapterretention
clip
Adapter-support
bracket
Complete the following steps to install a hot-plug PCI or PCI-X adapter:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. If you are installing an adapter that requires you to install or remove any
cables, turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables
(“Turning off the server” on page 9).
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server left-side cover and bezel
(tower model)” on page 55 or “Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack
configuration)” on page 57).
4. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
62
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: Only PCI-X slots 5 and 6 support hot-plug adapters.
Attention: Disabling a PCI-X slot turns off the power LED for that PCI-X slot.
Make sure that the power LED for the hot-plug PCI-X slot is off before you
continue with the next step. See “System-board LED locations” on page 53 for
the location of the power LED.
5. Disable the selected PCI-X slot from your operating system. (See the
documentation that comes with your operating system for information about
disabling a hot-plug PCI-X slot.)
6. Slide the orange adapter-retention-latch release toward the rear of the server
and hold it there while you lift the black adapter-retention latch to the unlocked
(open) position as indicated by the arrow.
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all empty slots. This
maintains the electronic emissions characteristics of the system and ensures
proper cooling of system components.
7. Remove the expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place for
future use.
8. If you are installing a full-length adapter, lift the adapter-retention clip on the
adapter-support bracket. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
9. See the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route cables before you install the
adapter.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter.
10. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
11. Install the adapter:
a. If you are installing a full-length adapter, remove the blue adapter guide (if
any) from the end of the adapter.
Adapter guide
b. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and align it
with the expansion slot on the system board.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the system-board connector. Incomplete
insertion might cause damage to the system board or the adapter.
c. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
d. Lower the adapter-retention latch over the top corner of the adapter. The
adapter-retention latch automatically locks into place.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
63
Important: Power cannot be restored to the adapter slot if the latch is not
lowered into place.
12. If you installed a full-length adapter, close the adapter-retention clip on the
adapter-support bracket. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
Attention: When you route the cables, do not block the ventilated space
around any of the fans.
13. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
14. Enable the hot-plug PCI-X slot from your operating system. When the hot-plug
PCI-X slot is enabled, the power LED for that hot-plug PCI-X slot comes on.
See the documentation that comes with your operating system for information
about enabling a hot-plug PCI-X slot.
15. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model)” on page 100 or
“Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)” on page 103.
Installing a non-hot-plug adapter (any slot)
The following illustration shows how to install a non-hot-plug PCI or PCI-X adapter.
Adapterretention
latch
Backup expansion-slot
screws
Expansionslot cover
Adapter
Adapterretention
clip
Adapter-support
bracket
Attention: You must install the IXA adapter jumper (J42) between pins 2 and 3
when using an Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA) in slots 5 and 6 (see
“System-board switches and jumpers” on page 51).
Notes:
1. Although an optional IXA adapter is not a hot-plug adapter, it can be installed
only in slots 5 and 6. It is a double width adapter that installs in slot 5 and
spans slots 5 and 6.
2. You can install an optional ServeRAID-5i controller only in PCI-X slot 4. Slot 4 is
the only PCI-X slot that supports the ServeRAID-5i controller requirements.
Install the ServeRAID-5i controller using the 3-U bracket that comes with the
controller. However, if a ServeRAID-5i controller is installed and later removed,
64
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
you must re-enable the on-board SCSI controller in using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program (see “Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility
program” on page 15).
Complete the following steps to install a non-hot-plug PCI or PCI-X adapter:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables
(“Turning off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see
“Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or
“Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
3. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
4. If you are installing an adapter in PCI slot 1 or PCI-X slots 2 through 4, lift the
tab on the expansion-slot cover. Continue with the next step.
If you are installing an adapter in PCI-X slot 5 or 6, slide the
adapter-retention-latch release toward the rear of the server and hold it there
while you lift the adapter-retention latch to the unlocked (open) position, as
shown in the illustration at “Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 5 and 6)” on
page 62.
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all empty slots. This
maintains the electronic emissions characteristics of the system and ensures
proper cooling of system components.
5. Remove the expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place for
future use.
6. If you are installing an IXA adapter in slot 5 and 6, make sure that the IXA
adapter jumper (J42) is installed between pins 2 and 3; otherwise, make sure it
is installed between pins 1 and 2. (See “System-board switches and jumpers”
on page 51 for the location of J42.)
7. If you are installing a full-length adapter, lift the adapter-retention clip on the
adapter-support bracket. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
8. See the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route cables before you install the
adapter.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter.
9. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
10. Install the adapter:
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
65
a. If you are installing a full-length adapter, remove the blue adapter guide (if
any) from the end of the adapter.
Adapter guide
b. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and align it
with the expansion slot on the system board.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the system-board connector. Incomplete
insertion might cause damage to the system board or the adapter.
c. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Note: If the server is subject to excessive movement or vibration, you can
secure the adapter with a screw: insert one of the backup
expansion-slot screws (stored next to slot 1) through the top of the
adapter bracket into the screw hole to secure the adapter before
proceeding to the next step.
d. Lower the adapter-retention latch over the top corner of the adapter. In slot
5 or 6, make sure the latch is in the locked (closed) position.
11. If you installed a full-length adapter, close the adapter-retention clip on the
adapter-support bracket. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
12. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
Attention: When you route the cables, do not block the ventilated space
around any of the fans.
13. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model)” on page 100 or
“Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)” on page 103.
Cabling example for a ServeRAID controller
You can install an optional IBM ServeRAID controller in your server to control the
internal hot-swap hard disk drives. A ServeRAID controller can, for example, enable
you to configure the internal hot-swap hard disk drives into disk arrays. The
illustrations in this section show the cabling for internal hot-swap hard disk drives.
You can also cable a ServeRAID adapter to external hard disk drives. See your
66
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
ServeRAID controller option documentation for complete instructions for installing a
ServeRAID controller in your server and for additional information about ServeRAID
controllers.
Notes:
1. This cabling example does not apply to the ServeRAID-5i controller, which uses
the integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities on the system board.
2. An optional ServeRAID-5i controller can be installed only in PCI-X slot 4. Slot 4
is the only PCI-X slot that supports the ServeRAID-5i controller requirements.
3. Connections made to external SCSI devices will be asynchronous.
If you are connecting the adapter to any internal SCSI backplane or device, you will
need to purchase additional SCSI cables. Contact your IBM marketing
representative or reseller for additional information about the number and types of
cables that your server configuration requires.
Your server comes with one SCSI cable that can only be used with the integrated
SCSI controller with RAID capabilities that is on the system board. One end of this
SCSI cable is attached to the connector on the SCSI backplane, and the other end
is attached to the SCSI channel A connector on the system board. The SCSI
channel B connector on the system board is available for use, but the server does
not come with a cable attached to it.
The following procedure describes the cable routing that is necessary when you
install a ServeRAID controller other than ServeRAID-5i.
Notes:
1. See the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions.
2. Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with your server and
options. Use these identifiers to connect the cables to the correct connectors.
For example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled “HDD option.”
Complete the following steps to cable the ServeRAID controller:
1. Determine the number of SCSI channels that you want to use on the
ServeRAID controller.
2. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
3. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables
(“Turning off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see
“Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or
“Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
4. Lift the adapter-retention clip on top of the adapter-support bracket; then,
remove the full-length adapters.
5. Lift and remove the plastic dividers from PCI-X slots 5 and 6 by lifting the ends
of the dividers out of the adapter support bracket and tilting the dividers up out
of the server.
6. Disconnect internal cables as necessary, remove the air-baffle assembly, and
remove the adapter-support bracket from the server. For complete details, see
“Removing and installing the adapter-support bracket” on page 58.
Note: You must remove the air-baffle assembly whenever you remove the
adapter-support bracket.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
67
7. Disconnect the internal SCSI cable from SCSI connector A (J44) or B (J51) on
the system board. See “System-board internal cable connectors” on page 49
for the location of the SCSI connectors.
Note: The SCSI cables that come with your server can only be used with the
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities. If a RAID controller
other than the ServeRAID-5i isinstalled, you must use SCSI cables that
are compatible with that controller. To select and order the correct
cables for use with your RAID controller, contact your IBM reseller or
IBM marketing representative.
8. Reinstall the adapter-support bracket in the server (see “Removing and
installing the adapter-support bracket” on page 58).
Important: To ensure proper cooling and server operation, you must keep the
air-baffle cover closed.
Note: You must reinstall the air-baffle assembly when you reinstall the
adapter-support bracket. Make sure that no cable is under the
adapter-support bracket or interferes with the center fans.
9. Reinstall the plastic dividers between the Active PCI-X adapter slots.
10. Reinstall the adapters that you removed. If you have not yet installed the
ServeRAID controller, install it now.
See “Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 5 and 6)” on page 62 or “Installing a
non-hot-plug adapter (any slot)” on page 64 for instructions for installing a
hot-plug or non-hot-plug adapter; then, return to this step.
11. Replace the SCSI cable on the SCSI backplane with the SCSI cable for your
new ServeRAID controller. The SCSI cable being replaced was one of the
cables that was disconnected from the system board in step 7.
12. Route the free end of the SCSI cable from the SCSI backplane through the
adapter-support bracket opening and toward the ServeRAID controller (see the
illustration in step 13).
13. Attach the free end of the SCSI cable to the selected internal SCSI channel
connector on the ServeRAID controller. Make sure that the other end of the
SCSI cable is attached to the connector on the SCSI backplane.
Attention: When you route the SCSI cable, do not block the ventilated space
around any of the fans.
The following illustration shows how to route one SCSI cable to the ServeRAID
controller.
68
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
ServeRAID
adapter
SCSI connector A
SCSI cable
14. If you are connecting the adapter to a second SCSI backplane on the server,
repeat steps 11 through 13 for the second backplane, and then continue with
step 15. Otherwise, continue with step 15.
The following illustration shows how to route two SCSI cables from backplanes
to the ServeRAID controller (in PCI slot 3 in this illustration).
ServeRAID
adapter
SCSI connector B
SCSI cable
Note: If you plan to attach external SCSI devices, you must order additional
SCSI cables. To select and order the correct cables for use with
external devices, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
69
15. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model)” on page 100 or
“Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)” on page 103.
Working with the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option
Your server contains hardware that enables you to replace a failed hard disk drive
without turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to
operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives
are known as hot-swap drives. The hot-swap drives are attached to a hot-swap
hard disk drive backplane. The backplane is a printed circuit board behind the drive
bays. For more information about drive bays and drive installation, see “Installing
internal drives” on page 74. The low voltage differential (LVD) SCSI hot-swap hard
disk drive backplane supports a maximum of six slim-high, hot-swap hard disk
drives.
If you install the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option, you can attach up to
three additional drives. All of these drives must be LVD hard disk drives that
operate at 320 MB per second or lower. The optional 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap
Expansion Kit contains a hot-swap hard disk drive backplane that you install
adjacent to the standard hot-swap hard disk drive backplane. It also includes the
SCSI cable you need to install the option. Your server supports a maximum of two
hot-swap drive backplanes.
Note: All drives being used in the server should have the same throughput speed
rating: mixing speed ratings might cause all drives to operate at the lower
throughput speed.
Do the following to configure the channels on the two SCSI backplanes:
v You can configure each SCSI channel (bus) independently. This is the typical
backplane configuration. In this configuration:
– The hard disk drives that are connected to the standard backplane are
attached to channel A.
– The hard disk drives that are connected to the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap
Expansion option backplane are attached to channel B.
Notes:
1. The standard LVD SCSI backplane is also known as the SCSI backplane or the
hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.
2. The SCSI backplane that comes with the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion
Kit is also known as the 3-Pack backplane.
3. Table 8 on page 112 lists the SCSI identifiers (IDs) for the standard LVD SCSI
backplane and hard disk drives. Table 9 on page 112 lists the SCSI IDs for the
3-Pack backplane and hard disk drives.
4. Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with your server and
options. Use these identifiers to connect the cables to the correct connectors.
For example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled “HDD option.”
5. For information about other options and using the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap
Expansion option, see the documentation that comes with the option kit.
6. For additional information about cabling, see “Cabling example for a ServeRAID
controller” on page 66 and “Cabling the server” on page 106.
7. The SCSI cables that come with your server can only be used with the
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities. If a RAID controller other than
the ServeRAID-5i is installed, you must use SCSI cables that are compatible
70
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
with that controller. To select and order the correct cables for use with your
RAID controller, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Installing the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option
Notes:
1. The 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion Kit might contain some components
that you will not need for this procedure. For information about the contents of
this option kit, see the documentation that comes with the option kit.
2. The 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option does not support use of a
SCSI repeater card.
Complete the following steps to install the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion
option:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables
(“Turning off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see
“Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or
“Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
3. If necessary, remove the air-baffle assembly, adapter-support bracket,
adapters, and plastic dividers. See “Removing and installing the
adapter-support bracket” on page 58 and “Working with adapters” on page 60
for additional information.
Attention: The server electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and
cooling are both protected by having the front bays covered or occupied. When
you install the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option, save the filler
panels from the bay, in case you later remove the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap
Expansion option and do not replace it with another device.
4. Remove the two filler panels from the removable-media bay opening. Store the
filler panels for future use.
5. Remove the custom metal slide rails and screws that are inside the 5.25-inch
removable-media drive bays. Store the slide rails and screws for future use.
6. Complete the following steps to attach the SCSI backplane to the drive cage:
Drive cage
SCSI backplane
Screws M3 x 5 (4)
a. Place the SCSI backplane on the rear of the cage with the hole and slot in
the SCSI backplane aligned with the pins on the drive cage, making sure
that the SCSI connector is at the top.
b. Attach the SCSI backplane to the drive cage using four short M3 x 5
screws.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
71
Note: The 3-Pack Hot-swap Hard Disk Drive Expansion Kit comes with
four long M3.5 x 7 screws and four short M3 x 5 screws. Make sure
you secure the SCSI backplane to the drive cage with the short
screws.
7. Align the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option with the empty
removable-media bay opening, adjacent to the standard hot-swap hard disk
drive backplane.
8. Partially slide the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option into the guides
through the front of the removable-media bay opening, as shown in the
following illustration. Leave adequate room at the rear of the 3-Pack Ultra320
Hot-Swap Expansion option to connect the required cables.
Filler panel
3-Pack Ultra320
Hot-Swap Expansion option
9. Locate the short SCSI cable that comes with this kit:
Note: The SCSI cables that come with this kit can only be used with the
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities. If a RAID controller
other than the ServeRAID-5i isinstalled, you must use SCSI cables that
are compatible with that controller. To select and order the correct
cables for use with your RAID controller, contact your IBM marketing
representative or authorized reseller.
a. Connect the end of the cable that is labeled “HDD backplane” to the new
3-Pack SCSI backplane as shown in the following illustration. (This
illustration shows the rear connectors on the 3-Pack SCSI backplane, as
viewed from the rear of the server.)
SCSI cable
connector
SCSI power
cable connector
2
I C cable
connector
SCSI backplane
72
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the SCSI connector on the system
board if you are using the integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities.
If you are using an optional RAID controller other than the ServeRAID-5i,
connect the other end of the cable to the SCSI connector on this RAID
controller.
c. Secure both cable ends with the retention clips on the SCSI connectors.
10. Locate the I2C cable that comes with this kit.
Note: Both I2C cable connectors are the same, enabling this cable to be
connected in either direction.
a. Connect one of the I2C cable connectors to the SCSI backplane.
b. Connect the other I2C cable connectors to the new 3-Pack SCSI
backplane. See the illustration in step 9 on page 72 for the cable connector
location.
11. Connect the end of the power-supply power cable that is labeled “HDD2” to the
new 3-Pack backplane. See the illustration in step 9 for the cable connector
location.
12. Slide the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option into the server until it
stops. Secure the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option to the server
with the four screws that come with it.
13. If you removed the air-baffle assembly, adapters, plastic dividers, and
adapter-support bracket in step 3 on page 71, reinstall them (see “Removing
and installing the adapter-support bracket” on page 58).
Note: Make sure that no cable is under the adapter-support bracket or
interferes with the center fans.
14. Install additional internal hot-swap hard disk drives in the 3-Pack Ultra320
Hot-Swap Expansion option (see “Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on
page 77).
Note: The 3-Pack backplane sets the SCSI IDs for these hot-swap hard disk
drives. See “SCSI IDs” on page 111 for additional information.
15. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model)” on page 100 or
“Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)” on page 103.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
73
Installing internal drives
If you add different types of drives, your system can read multiple types of media
and store more data. Several types of drives are available, such as:
v Diskette
v Hard disk
v CD-ROM
v DVD-ROM
v Tape, including digital linear tape (DLT), super digital linear tape (SDLT), and
linear tape-open (LTO)
Note: The server supports both internal and external tape drives.
Your server contains hardware that enables you to replace a failed hard disk drive
without turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to
operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives
are known as hot-swap drives.
Each hot-swap drive has two indicator LEDs (see “Server controls and indicators”
on page 4). If the amber hard disk status LED for a drive is lit continuously, that
individual drive is faulty and requires replacement. When the hard disk drive status
LED indicates a drive fault, you can replace a hot-swap drive without turning off the
server.
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must be mounted in a hot-swap-drive
tray. The drive must have a Single Connector Attachment (SCA) connector.
Hot-swap-drive trays come with hot-swap drives.
74
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Internal drive bays
Internal drives are installed in bays.
Tower model
USB connector
Non-hot-swap
bay A
Non-hot-swap
bay D
Non-hot-swap
bay B
SCSI ID 5
Non-hot-swap
bay C
Hard disk drive
activity light
Hard disk drive
status light
SCSI ID 4
Hot-swap bays
SCSI ID 3
SCSI ID 2
SCSI ID 1
SCSI ID 0
Rack configuration
Hot-swap bays
SCSI ID 5
Non-hot-swap
bay A
Non-hot-swap
bay B
Non-hot-swap
bay C
Non-hot-swap
bay D
USB connector
SCSI ID 0
SCSI ID 1
SCSI ID 4
SCSI ID 3
SCSI ID 2
Hard disk drive
activity light
Hard disk drive
status light
Note: The SCSI IDs for the hot-swap drives are printed on the bezel, immediately
adjacent to the hot-swap drive bays (see Table 8 on page 112).
v Your server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB diskette drive.
v Your server also comes with one integrated drive electronics (IDE) CD-ROM
drive. The CD-ROM drive bay supports a 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media
drive.
v You can install two additional 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media drives or one
additional 5.25-inch, full-high, removable-media drive in the removable-media
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
75
drive bays (A and B). The server supports full-high and half-high DLT, SDLT, and
LTO drives. For a list of supported options for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World Wide Web.
A three-drop power signal cable and a one-drop IDE cable come attached to the
CD-ROM drive. Use this power signal cable to connect the removable-media
drives. The one-drop SCSI signal cable that comes with your server will need to
be replaced with a two-drop SCSI signal cable to provide a signal connection to
the removable-media drives.
v You cannot install hot-swap drives in the removable-media or non-hot-swap drive
bays on the front side of the server, unless you install the 3-Pack Ultra320
Hot-Swap Expansion option.
v Your server supports a maximum of six 1-inch (26 mm) slim-high, 3.5-inch,
hot-swap hard disk drives in the standard hot-swap bays. In the tower model, the
hot-swap bays are arranged vertically in the standard hard disk drive cage; the
bay numbers are 0 through 5 (from bottom to top). In the rack configuration, the
hot-swap bays are arranged horizontally in the standard hard disk drive cage; the
bay numbers are 0 through 5 (from left to right). In the tower model, bays 0
through 5 are below the removable-media drive bays. In the rack configuration,
bays 0 through 5 are to the left of the removable-media drive bays.
Notes:
1. To minimize the possibility of damage to the hard disk drives when you are
installing them in a rack configuration, install the server in the rack before
installing the hard disk drives.
2. You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap
drive bays. However, you must turn off the server when performing any steps
that involve installing or removing cables.
3. You can install three additional hot-swap hard disk drives in the server after you
install the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option (see “Working with the
3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option” on page 70). These drives are in
the optional hard disk drive cage. The SCSI IDs are listed in Table 8 on
page 112.
4. Some filler panels might come with a slim filler.
76
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive
The following illustration shows how to install a hot-swap hard disk drive.
Slim
filler panel
Hard disk drive
Drive tray
Drive tray handle
(in open position)
Complete the following steps to install a drive in a hot-swap bay.
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more
than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed for each bay.
Note: All hot-swap drives being used in the server should have the same
throughput speed rating; mixing speed ratings might cause all drives to
operate at the lower throughput speed.
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Remove the filler panel from one of the empty hot-swap bays.
3. Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure that the tray handle is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.
c. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive stops.
d. Push the tray handle to the closed (locked) position.
e. Check the hard disk drive status indicator to verify that the hard disk drive is
operating properly.
If the amber hard disk drive status LED for a drive is lit continuously, that
drive is faulty and needs to be replaced. If the green hard disk drive activity
LED is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
Note: If your server is configured for RAID operation using the integrated SCSI
controller with RAID capabilities or an optional ServeRAID controller, you
might need to reconfigure your disk arrays after installing hard disk
drives. See the ServeRAID documentation on the IBM ServeRAID
Support CD for additional information on RAID operation and complete
instructions for using ServeRAID Manager.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
77
Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media drive
Your server also comes with one integrated drive electronics (IDE) CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM drive bay supports a 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media drive.
You can install two additional 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media drives or one
additional 5.25-inch, full-high, removable-media drive in the removable-media drive
bays (A and B).
A three-drop power cable comes with your server. Use this cable to connect power
to the removable-media drives. The one-drop SCSI signal cable that comes with
your server will need to be replaced with a two-drop SCSI signal cable to provide a
signal connection to the removable-media drives.
Note: The SCSI cables that come with your server can only be used with the
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities. If a RAID controller other
than the ServeRAID-5i isinstalled, you must use SCSI cables that are
compatible with that controller. To select and order the correct cables for use
with your RAID controller, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
Check the instructions that come with the drive to see if you need to set any
switches or jumpers on the drive.
Complete the following steps to install a removable-media drive in bay A or B (see
“Internal drive bays” on page 75):
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables
(“Turning off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see
“Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or
“Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
3. Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive.
4. Remove the filler panel from the removable-media bay opening. Store the filler
panel for future use.
Note: The server electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and cooling are
both protected by having the front bays covered or occupied. When you
install a drive, save the filler panel from the bay, in case you later
remove the drive and do not replace it with another.
5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and
place it on a static-protective surface.
6. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to the documentation that
comes with the drive.
7. Install the drive:
See the following illustration when installing a 5.25-inch removable-media
drive.
Note: Use the blue plastic slide rails that come with the server as described in
this step, unless the drive comes with custom metal slide rails.
78
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
If you are installing an SDLT drive, use the custom metal slide rails and
screws that come with the option package. Follow the installation
instructions that come with the option package; then, continue with step
7c.
If you are installing a full-high DLT drive, use the custom metal slide
rails and screws that are inside the 5.25-inch removable-media drive
bays. Follow the installation instructions that come with the option
package; then, continue with step 7d.
Blue slide rails
Filler panel
Non-hot-swap bay
Non-hot-swap
drive
Slide rails
a. Remove the blue snap-on slide rails from inside the filler panel.
b. Clip the slide rails onto the sides of the drive.
c. Store the filler panel for later use.
d. Align the slide rails on the drive with the guide rails in the bay; then, slide
the drive into the bay until it snaps into place.
8. Replace the one-drop SCSI signal cable in your server with a two-drop SCSI
signal cable, connecting the additional connector on the two-drop SCSI signal
cable to the rear of the removable-media drive.
9. Connect a power cable to the back of the drive. A three-drop power cable for
removable-media drives comes installed in your server. It is attached to the
standard CD-ROM drive. The connectors are keyed and can be inserted only
one way.
10. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 99.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
79
Installing memory modules
Adding memory to your server is an easy way to make programs run faster. You
can increase the amount of memory in your server by installing memory-module
options. When you install memory, you must install a pair of matched dual inline
memory modules (DIMMs).
Notes:
1. The system board contains 6 DIMM connectors and supports two-way memory
interleaving.
2. The DIMM options available for your server are 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and
1 GB. Your server supports a minimum of 256 MB and a maximum of 6 GB of
system memory.
3. The amount of usable memory will be reduced depending on the system
configuration. A certain amount of memory must be reserved for system
resources. The BIOS will display the total amount of installed memory and the
amount of configured memory.
4. When you install additional DIMMs, be sure to install them in pairs. Both of the
DIMMs in a single pair must be the same size, speed, type and technology. You
can mix compatible DIMMs from various manufacturers.
5. Each DIMM pair does not have to contain DIMMs of the same size, speed, type,
and technology as the first pair.
6. Install only 133 MHz/266 MHz, 2.5 V, 184-pin, double-data-rate (DDR), PC2100,
registered synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) with error
correcting code (ECC) DIMMs. These DIMMs must be compatible with the latest
PC2100 SDRAM Registered DIMM specification. For a list of supported options
for your server, go to http://www.ibm.com/us/compat/ on the World Wide Web.
7. Your server supports Chipkill™ memory if the DIMMs are all type x4 and are
larger than 128 MB. Using any 128 MB DIMMs, or DIMMs that are not type x4,
on your server disables Chipkill memory.
8. You do not need to save new configuration information when installing or
removing DIMMs. The only exception is if you replace a faulty DIMM that was
marked as Disabled in the Memory Settings menu. In this case, you need to
re-enable that memory row in the Configuration/Setup Utility or reload the
default memory settings (see “Choices available from the Configuration/Setup
main menu” on page 16).
Install the DIMMs in the order shown in the following table.
Table 7. DIMM installation sequence
80
Pair
DIMM connectors
Diagnostic reference
First
6 and 5 (J15, J14)
Bank 3
Second
4 and 3 (J12, J11)
Bank 2
Third
2 and 1 (J9, J7)
Bank 1
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
The following illustration shows the DIMM connector locations and how to install
DIMMs on the system board.
DIMM 6 (J15)
DIMM 5 (J14)
DIMM 4 (J12)
DIMM 3 (J11)
DIMM 2 (J9)
DIMM 1 (J7)
Before you begin, read the documentation that comes with your option.
Complete the following steps to install a DIMM:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
81
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables (“Turning
off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see “Removing the
server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or “Removing the
server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
3. Open the cover on the air-baffle assembly.
Air-baffle assembly
cover
Note: It is not necessary to remove the air-baffle assembly to perform this step.
4. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board. Determine the connectors
into which you will install the DIMMs. (See Table 7 on page 80 for the correct
DIMM installation sequence.)
5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM option to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the
package.
6. To install the DIMMs, repeat the following steps for each DIMM that you install:
a. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector on
the system board.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, handle the clips gently.
b. Insert the DIMM by pressing the DIMM straight into the connector. Be sure
that the retaining clips snap into the closed positions.
Note: If a gap exists between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM
has not been properly installed. In this case, open the retaining clips
and remove the DIMM; then, reinsert the DIMM.
7. Close the cover on the air-baffle assembly.
8. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model)” on page 100 or
“Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)” on page 103.
82
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Installing an additional microprocessor
Your server comes with one or two microprocessors installed on the system board.
Your server supports up to two microprocessors. With two microprocessors, your
server can operate as a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server. With SMP, certain
operating systems and application programs can distribute the processing load
among the microprocessors. If your server comes with one microprocessor, you can
install a second microprocessor.
Before you begin:
v Thoroughly review the documentation that comes with the microprocessor to
determine the required BIOS update. The latest level of BIOS code for your
server is available through the World Wide Web (see “Recovering the BIOS
code” on page 40).
v (Optional) Obtain an SMP-capable operating system. For a list of supported
operating systems and other options, go to http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on
the World Wide Web.
Attention:
v To ensure proper server operation when you install an additional microprocessor,
use microprocessors that have the same cache size and type, and the same
clock speed. Microprocessor internal and external clock frequencies must be
identical. You can use the Configuration/Setup Utility program in your server to
determine the specific type of microprocessor on your system board.
v Some models of the xSeries 235 are designed for 400 MHz microprocessors
while others are designed for 533 MHz microprocessors. An attempt to plug a
400 MHz microprocessor into a system board designed for a 533 MHz processor
may damage the components.
v If the CR14 LED on the system board is illuminated (see “System-board LED
locations” on page 53), it indicates a microprocessor mismatch.
For a list of microprocessors supported by your server, see the ServerProven® list
at http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World Wide Web.
Important: A boot processor must always be installed in socket U13 of the system
board.
Notes:
1. To order additional microprocessor options, contact your IBM reseller or IBM
marketing representative.
2. When you install a microprocessor in socket U9, you must also install the
voltage regulator module (VRM) that comes with the microprocessor, in VRM
connector J1.
3. The microprocessor sockets in this server contain built-in termination for the
microprocessor bus; therefore, terminator cards are not required for empty
microprocessor sockets. However, for airflow, an empty microprocessor socket
must contain a microprocessor baffle.
4. The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you
do not need to set any microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.
5. If you need to remove a microprocessor, see “Microprocessor removal” on
page 117.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
83
The following illustration is a simplified layout of the microprocessor connector
locations and other microprocessor-related components on the system board.
Attention: The speed of the microprocessor must match the speed of the system
board. The 533 MHz system board is identified as shown in the following
illustration; the 400 MHz system board is not marked.
System board identification
(some models)
Microprocessor 2 (U9)
533 MNz FSB
CPU ONLY
VRM 2 (J1)
Microprocessor 1 (U13)
VRM 1 (J17)
Note: For additional illustrations of the system-board components, see
“System-board option connectors” on page 48.
Complete the following steps to install an additional microprocessor:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
84
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables
(“Turning off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see
“Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or
“Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
3. Open the cover on the air-baffle assembly. (See the illustration following step 3
on page 82, if needed.)
Note: It is not necessary to remove the air-baffle assembly to perform this
step.
4. Locate the second microprocessor socket (connector U27) on the system
board.
5. Remove the microprocessor baffle from the microprocessor socket.
6. Remove the protective cover, tape or label from the surface of the
microprocessor socket, if present.
Heatsink 2
Microprocessor 2
Captive screws
VRM 2
Microprocessor
baffle
Microprocessorrelease lever
DIMMs
7. Install a VRM in the corresponding VRM connector (J1):
a. Center the VRM over the connector. Make sure that the VRM is oriented
and aligned correctly.
b. Carefully but firmly push down the VRM clip handle to seat the VRM in the
connector.
c. Make sure that the VRM clip locks on the VRM connector at both sides.
CAUTION:
You must lift up the microprocessor-release lever before inserting the
microprocessor into the socket. Inserting the microprocessor into the
socket without lifting up the microprocessor-release lever can damage
the microprocessor and system board.
8. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package containing the new microprocessor to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the
microprocessor from the package.
b. Rotate the locking lever on the microprocessor socket from its closed and
locked position until it stops or clicks in the fully open position
(approximately 135° angle), as shown. Then, see the documentation
provided with the microprocessor option for complete installation
instructions.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
85
Attention: You must ensure that the locking lever on the microprocessor
socket is in the fully open position before you insert the microprocessor in
the socket. Failure to do so might result in permanent damage to the
microprocessor, microprocessor socket, and system board.
Lever
fully
open
Lever closed
Lever
fully
open
Lever closed
c. Center the microprocessor over the microprocessor socket. Align the
triangle on the corner of the microprocessor with the triangle on the corner
of the socket and carefully press the microprocessor into the socket.
Attention:
v Do not use excessive force when pressing the microprocessor into the
socket.
v Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented and aligned correctly with
pin number 1 in the socket before you try to close the
microprocessor-release lever. The following illustration shows the
alignment marks for both microprocessors and sockets.
Microprocessor 2
Microprocessor 1
Alignment marks
Alignment marks
Microprocessor
socket 2
Microprocessor
socket 1
d. Carefully close the microprocessor-release lever to secure the
microprocessor in the socket.
9. Install a heat sink on the microprocessor:
a. Remove the protective film from the bottom of the heat sink.
Notes:
1) Do not set the heat sink down after you remove the protective film.
86
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Thermal grease
Heat sink
2) Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat sink.
Touching the thermal grease will contaminate it. If the thermal grease
on the microprocessor or heat sink becomes contaminated, contact
your service technician.
b. Align and place the heat sink on top of the microprocessor (grease side
down) in the retention bracket. Press firmly on the heat sink.
c. Secure the heat sink to the microprocessor by tightening the captive
screws. Alternate between the two captive screws in the heat sink while
tightening them.
Attention: Alternate the tightening of the two captive screws to prevent
damage to the microprocessor. Ensure that the screws are completely
tightened (until they stop); otherwise, damage to the microprocessor will
occur.
10. Close the cover on the air-baffle assembly.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model)” on page 100 or
“Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)” on page 103.
Replacing a hot-swap power supply
Some models of your server come with two hot-swap power supplies. You do not
need to turn off the server to replace a hot-swap power supply, but you must
replace only one power supply at a time.
I/O cable-restraint
bracket
Hot-swap
power supply 2
Release latch
Handle
AC power LED
DC power LED
Hot-swap
power supply 1
2
1
Power-cord
restraint bracket
Before you continue with the power-supply replacement procedure, review the
following.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
87
Notes:
1. Two cable-restraint brackets are on the rear of the tower model servers. After
you connect the cables to the selected devices, you can use these
cable-restraint brackets to manage the cable routing. Route the power cords
through the power-cord restraint bracket on the bottom. Route the remaining
cables (for example, the cables that are connected to the I/O ports) through the
I/O cable-restraint bracket on the top.
If you install or remove a power supply, observe the following precautions.
88
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Statement 8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label
attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that
has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you
suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician.
Complete the following steps to replace a hot-swap power supply:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Unplug the power cord from the selected power supply.
3. Remove the old power supply.
I/O cable-restraint
bracket
Power supply
1
2
Power-supply handle
(in open position)
Power-cord restraint
bracket
a. Press the orange release lever and pull the power-supply handle. This
moves the power supply out of the power-supply bay slightly.
b. Pull the power supply out of the bay and set it aside.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
89
4. Install the replacement power supply.
I/O cable-restraint
bracket
Power supply
1
2
Power-supply handle
(half open position)
Power-cord restraint
bracket
a. Make sure the handle on the power supply is in the open position, hanging
loosely.
b. Slide the power supply all the way into the chassis; then, press the handle
to the closed position until it clicks into place.
5. Plug one end of the power cord into the corresponding connector on the power
supply; then, plug the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Note: You can route the power cord through the power-cord restraint bracket
on the rear of the server (tower model only).
6. If the server is not on, turn on the server.
7. Verify that the dc power LED and the ac power LED on the power supply are lit,
indicating that the power supply is operating properly.
Installing a hot-swap power-supply option
Your server comes with one fixed power supply or two hot-swap power supplies,
depending on the server model. If your server has one fixed power supply, you can
replace it with the hot-swap power-supply option, giving you two hot-swap power
supplies. The two hot-swap power supplies provide power redundancy.
90
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
One fixed power supply
Fan 1 LED
Fan 2 LED
AC power LED
(green)
DC power LED
(green)
Ethernet link
status LED
PCI-X slot 5
attention LED
2
1
PCI-X slot 6
attention LED
NMI button
(service use only)
Two hot-swap power supplies
I/O cable-restraint
bracket
Hot-swap
power supply 2
Release latch
Handle
AC power LED
DC power LED
Hot-swap
power supply 1
2
1
Power-cord
restraint bracket
Before you continue with the power-supply removal and installation procedure,
review the following information.
Notes:
1. During normal operation, both hot-swap power-supply bays must have power
supplies installed for redundancy.
2. Two cable-restraint brackets are on the rear of the tower model servers. After
you install the hot-swap power-supply option and connect the cables to the
selected devices, you can use these cable-restraint brackets to manage the
cable routing. Route the power cords through the power-cord restraint bracket
on the bottom. Route the remaining cables (for example, the cables that are
connected to the I/O ports) through the I/O cable-restraint bracket on the top.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
91
If you install or remove a power supply, observe the following precautions.
Statement 8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label
attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that
has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you
suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician.
Complete the following steps to remove the fixed power supply and install the
hot-swap power-supply option.
Note: If your server is a tower model, you might find it easier to install the
hot-swap power-supply option if you turn the server on its side so that the
power supply is on the bottom.
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables
(“Turning off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see
“Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or
“Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
3. Remove the adapter-support bracket. See “Removing and installing the
adapter-support bracket” on page 58 for instructions.
4. Disconnect the power-supply cables from the system board and devices in
your server.
a. Disconnect the small-device power cable (P7) from the back of the diskette
drive.
Note: You might need to remove the diskette drive from the server in order
to disconnect and reconnect its cables. The diskette drive is held in
the server by release tabs that are accessed by removing the server
front bezel.
b. Disconnect the device power connector (P5) from the back of the CD-ROM
drive.
c. Disconnect the other device power connectors (P4 and P6) from the rear of
any other devices in the server.
d. Disconnect the SCSI cable (P2) from the SCSI backplane.
e. Disconnect the power cable (P1) from the J4 connector on the system
board.
f. Disconnect the power signal cable (P3) from the J10 connector on the
system board.
g. If your server has the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option
installed, disconnect the power connector (P8) from the power connector
on the 3-Pack backplane.
92
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
5. Remove the fixed power supply (see the following illustration).
1
2
a. From the rear of the server, remove the two screws at each side of the
fixed power supply.
b. Gently pull the power supply from the server, making sure the cables do
not snag on the chassis or system board.
Note: You might need to insert a fingernail or screwdriver blade behind
one corner of the power supply to begin moving it.
CAUTION:
When installing the power supply, do not pull it into position by its
cables.
6. Install the hot-swap power-supply option.
Note: The option consists of a hot-swap power-supply cage containing two
hot-swap power supplies, with all necessary cables attached to the back
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
93
of the option.
Cables
1
2
Hot-swap power
supply option
a. Push the cables on the back of the power-supply option into the
power-supply bay first; then, slide the hot-swap power-supply cage with
power supplies into the power-supply bay.
b. From inside the server, pull the cables on the back of the power-supply
cage up from under the system board.
c. Secure the hot-swap power-supply cage to the server by installing the two
screws at each side of the hot-swap power-supply cage.
7. Connect the power-supply cables to the system board and devices in your
server.
Note: Each connector on these cables is unique. Only one type of cable can
be attached to each connector on the system board, backplanes, or
devices.
a. Connect the small-device power cable (P7) to the back of the diskette
drive.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
94
Note: You might need to remove the diskette drive from the server in order
to disconnect and reconnect its cables. The diskette drive is held in
the server by release tabs that are accessed by removing the server
front bezel.
Connect the P5 device power connector to the back of the CD-ROM drive.
Connect the other device power connectors (P4 and P6) to the rear of any
other devices in the server.
Connect the SCSI cable (P2) to the SCSI backplane.
Connect the power cable (P1) to the J4 connector on the system board.
Connect the power signal cable (P3) to the J10 connector on the system
board.
If your server has the 3-Pack Ultra320 Hot-Swap Expansion option
installed, connect the power connector (P8) to the power connector on the
3-Pack backplane.
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
8. Reinstall the adapter-support bracket. See “Removing and installing the
adapter-support bracket” on page 58 for instructions.
9. Replace the server cover (see “Installing the server bezel and left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 100 or “Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack
configuration)” on page 103.
10. Plug one end of each power cord into the corresponding connector on the
power supply; then, plug the other end of each power cord into a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Note: You can route the power cords through the power-cord restraint bracket
on the rear of the server (tower model only).
11. If the server is not on, turn on the server.
12. Verify that the dc power LED and the ac power LED on each power supply are
lit, indicating that the power supply is operating properly.
Replacing a hot-swap fan
Your server comes with six hot-swap fans: two front fans (fans 5 and 6), two center
fans (fans 3 and 4), and two rear fans (fans 1 and 2). The two front fans are also
known as blowers. You do not need to turn off the power to the server to replace a
hot-swap fan.
Attention:
To help ensure proper cooling, if a fan fails, replace it within 48 hours.
The following illustration shows how to replace hot-swap fans.
Rear fan 1 or 2
Fan-release
latch
Front fan 5 or 6
Center fan
3 or 4
Fan-assembly
latch
Hot-swap fan
assembly
Hot-swap fan
Release lever
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
95
Determine which fan to replace by checking the LEDs on the fans. The front fans,
center fans, and rear fans are installed differently from each other. This section
contains separate instructions for each group of fans.
Replacing a front fan
Complete the following steps to replace front fan 5 or 6 (blower):
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server left-side cover and bezel
(tower model)” on page 55 or “Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack
configuration)” on page 57).
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove the server cover
for more than 30 minutes during this procedure.
3. Press the orange fan-release latch in the direction indicated by the arrow.
4. Pull the fan out of the server.
5. Align the two tabs on the replacement fan with the notches in the server and
press the fan into the corresponding connector. Press the front edge of the fan
to engage the latch fully and secure the fan in the server.
6. Verify that the FAN LED on the diagnostic LED panel (see “Light Path
Diagnostics” on page 38) is not lit. If the FAN LED is lit, reseat the fan.
7. Reinstall the server cover (see “Installing the server bezel and left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 100 or “Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack
configuration)” on page 103).
Replacing a center fan
Complete the following steps to replace center fan 3 or 4:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server left-side cover and bezel
(tower model)” on page 55 or “Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack
configuration)” on page 57).
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove the server cover
for more than 30 minutes during this procedure.
3. Press the orange fan-release latch in the direction indicated by the arrow; the
latch will rotate downward.
4. Pull the fan out of the server.
5. Press the orange fan-release latch in the direction indicated by the arrow and
open the latch; then, slide the replacement fan into the server. Press the latch
up to snap it into place and secure the fan in the server.
Note: When you slide the fan into the server, make sure the orange fan-release
latch is at the top.
6. Verify that the FAN LED on the diagnostic LED panel (see “Light Path
Diagnostics” on page 38) is not lit. If the FAN LED is lit, reseat the fan.
7. Reinstall the server cover (see “Installing the server bezel and left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 100 or “Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack
configuration)” on page 103).
Replacing a rear fan
Complete the following step to replace rear fan 1 or 2:
96
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Pull out on the orange fan-release latch on the rear fan bracket; then, lift the fan
up and out of the hinge cutouts.
3. Touch an unpainted metal part of the server for at least 2 seconds; then, slide
the replacement fan into the server. (Make sure that the fan fits correctly into
the hinge cutouts on the rear of the server.)
4. When you have the fan properly seated, push on the fan-release latch until it
clicks into place.
5. Verify that the FAN LED on the diagnostic LED panel (see “Light Path
Diagnostics” on page 38) is not lit. If the FAN LED is lit, reseat the fan.
Replacing the battery
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must be
handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must
adhere to the following instructions.
Note: In the U. S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a battery with
heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental consideration.
Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be disposed of with
normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge by the manufacturer,
distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of in a proper manner.
To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-772-2227 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and Canada,
call your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure your server and reset the
system date and time.
Statement 2:
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water.
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
97
For further information on battery disposal, call IBM at 1-800-IBM-4333
(1-800-426-4333) in the U.S. For information outside of the U.S., contact an IBM
reseller or marketing representative.
Complete the following steps to replace the battery:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Follow any special handling and installation instructions supplied with the
battery.
3. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 9) and all attached
devices and disconnect all power cords and external cables; then, remove the
server cover (see “Removing the server left-side cover and bezel (tower
model)” on page 55 or “Removing the server top cover and bezel (rack
configuration)” on page 57).
4. Lift the adapter-retention bracket on top of the adapter-support bracket; then,
remove the full-length adapters and plastic dividers (see “Working with
adapters” on page 60).
5. Remove the plastic shield covering the bottom portion of the system board.
6. Locate the battery (connector BH1) on the system board.
VRM 2 (J1)
Microprocessor 2
(U9)
DIMM 1 (J7)
Microprocessor 1
(U13)
DIMM 3 (J11)
VRM 1 (J17)
DIMM 5 (J14)
DIMM 2 (J9)
DIMM 4 (J12)
DIMM 6 (J15)
Remote Supervisor
Adapter (J27)
PCI slot 1 32-bit 5.0 V
(J32)
PCI-X slot 2 64-bit 3.3 V
(J36)
PCI-X slot 3 64-bit 3.3 V
(J38)
PCI-X slot 4 64-bit 3.3 V
(J41)
PCI-X slot 5 64-bit 3.3 V
133 MHz hot-plug (J43)
PCI-X slot 6 64-bit 3.3 V
133 MHz hot-plug (J45)
Battery (BH1)
7. Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to press the top of the battery clip away from the battery
until the battery releases upward from the socket.
b. Lift and remove the battery from the socket.
98
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
8. Insert the new battery:
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the socket on the side opposite
the battery clip.
b. Press the battery down into the socket until it clicks into place. Make sure
the battery clip holds the battery securely.
9. Replace the plastic shield covering the bottom portion of the system board.
10. Reinstall the adapter-support bracket in the server (see “Removing and
installing the adapter-support bracket” on page 58).
Note: You must reinstall the air-baffle assembly when you reinstall the
adapter-support bracket. Make sure that no cable is under the
adapter-support bracket or interferes with the center fans.
Important: To ensure proper cooling and server operation, you must keep the
air-baffle cover closed.
11. Reinstall the adapters and plastic dividers that you removed, and reconnect the
internal cables that you disconnected.
12. Reinstall the server cover (see “Installing the server bezel and left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 100 or “Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack
configuration)” on page 103).
Note: You must wait approximately 20 seconds after you plug the power cord
of your server into an electrical outlet before the power-control button
becomes active.
13. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and set configuration parameters
as needed (see “Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15).
Completing the installation
To complete your installation, you must reinstall the bezel, reinstall the server cover,
reconnect all the cables that you disconnected earlier and, for certain options, run
the Configuration/Setup Utility program. Follow the instructions in this section.
Attention:
v For proper cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before or shortly after
turning on the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (over 30
minutes) with the server cover removed might damage server components.
v To ensure proper server operation, do not remove the air-baffle assembly from
the server except when installing or removing the components that are under the
air-baffle cover.
Note: If you have just plugged the power cords of your server into electrical outlets,
you will have to wait approximately 20 seconds before pressing the
power-control button.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
99
Installing the server bezel and left-side cover (tower model)
The following illustration shows how to install the bezel on the tower model server.
Bezel
Complete the following steps to install the bezel:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Insert the two tabs on the bottom of the bezel into the matching holes on the
server chassis.
3. Push the top of the bezel toward the server until the two tabs at the top of the
bezel snap into place.
100
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
The following illustration shows how to install the left-side cover on the tower model
server.
Slots
Left-side cover
Complete the following steps to install the server left-side cover:
1. Before installing the cover, check that all cables, adapters, and other
components are installed and seated correctly and that you have not left loose
tools or parts inside the server.
2. Place the bottom lip of the left-side cover over the bottom edge of the server
chassis.
3. Rotate the left-side cover to a vertical position, inserting the tabs at the top of
the left-side cover into the matching slots in the server chassis.
4. Slide the left-side cover forward until it locks in place.
5. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the
cables; then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Note: If necessary, see “Input/output connectors” on page 108 for connector
locations.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
101
Installing the server door (tower model)
The following illustration shows how to install the door on the server.
Flange
Door
Complete the following steps to install the server door:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Set the door on the bottom hinge.
3. Locate the flange on the top edge of the door.
4. Press the flange downward while pressing the top of the door toward the server
until the flange connects with the top hinge. Release the flange.
5. Close the server door.
Attention: Be sure to maintain a clearance of at least 100 mm (4 inches) on
the front and rear of the server to allow for air circulation.
102
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack configuration)
The following illustration shows how to install the bezel on a rack configuration
server.
Bezel
Complete the following steps to install the bezel:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Insert the two tabs on the bottom of the bezel into the matching holes on the
server chassis.
3. Push the top of the bezel toward the server until the two tabs at the top of the
bezel snap into place.
The following illustration shows how to install the server top cover on a rack
configuration server.
Flange
2
E
M
E
P
L
Y
B
U
A
T
R
S
M
E
U
N
R
O
R
E
N
E
D
U
N
E
S
S
R
O
D
D
H
C
R
O
T
P
N
D
A
V
M
R
O
C
M
P
R
Y
N
IM S
IM S
E B
R U
IV S
C
E
U
T
U
P
P
IC
B
P
S
A
R
E
3
O
W
2
P
1
3
N
F
A
1
Top cover
Flange
Cover release
latch
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
103
Complete the following steps to install the server top cover:
1. Before installing the cover, check that all cables, adapters, and other
components are installed and seated correctly and that you have not left loose
tools or parts inside the server.
2. Place the cover-release latch in the open (up) position.
3. Place the lip of the left side of the top cover over the top-left edge of the server
chassis.
4. Rotate the top cover to a horizontal position, inserting the tabs at the right side
of the top cover into the matching slots in the server chassis.
5. Slide the top cover forward until it locks in place.
6. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the
cables; then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Note: If necessary, see “Input/output connectors” on page 108 for connector
locations. The Rack Installation Instructions provided on the IBM xSeries
Documentation CD also give additional rack installation and cabling
information.
Updating your server configuration
When you start your server for the first time after you add or remove an internal
option or an external SCSI device, you might see a message telling you that the
configuration has changed. The Configuration/Setup Utility program automatically
starts so that you can save the new configuration information (see “Starting the
Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15).
Some options have device drivers that you need to install. See the documentation
that comes with your option for information about installing any required device
drivers.
Your server comes with one or two microprocessors installed on the system board.
If your server comes with two microprocessors, or if your server comes with one
microprocessor and you have installed an additional microprocessor, your server
can now operate as an SMP server. Therefore, you might need to upgrade your
operating system to support SMP. See the ServerGuide information (“Using the
ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD” on page 22) and your operating-system
documentation for additional information.
If your server has a RAID configuration using the integrated SCSI controller with
RAID capabilities or has a ServeRAID controller installed and you have installed or
removed a hard disk drive, see the ServeRAID documentation on the IBM
ServeRAID Support CD for information about configuring your disk arrays.
Connecting external options
To attach external devices, you might need additional cables (see Chapter 7, “Parts
listing for the xSeries 235”, on page 161).
If you install an optional SCSI adapter or use channel B on the integrated SCSI
controller for external devices, you can attach external SCSI devices, such as a
SCSI storage expansion enclosure, to your server. For a list of supported options
for your server, go to http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World Wide Web.
Note: See “Ultra320 SCSI system-board connectors” on page 110 for additional
information about SCSI cabling and SCSI IDs.
104
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
If you plan to attach more than one external serial device, you must install the
optional second serial port.
Installing the external SCSI connector
Complete the following steps to install the optional external SCSI connector needed
to attach an external SCSI device:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables (“Turning
off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see “Removing the
server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or “Removing the
server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove the server cover
for more than 30 minutes during this procedure.
3. Remove the external SCSI knockout on the rear of the server (see “Cabling the
server” on page 106 for external SCSI knockout location).
4. Follow the instructions that come with the option to prepare it for installation and
to connect it to the server.
5. Route one end of the optional external SCSI cable to the external SCSI B
connector (J51) on the system board (see “System-board internal cable
connectors” on page 49 for the location of the SCSI connector); then, secure
the external SCSI connector at the other end of the cable into the external SCSI
knockout hole on the rear of the server.
6. Reinstall the server cover (see “Installing the server bezel and left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 100 or “Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack
configuration)” on page 103).
7. Reconnect all the devices, power cords, and cables that you disconnected;
then, turn on the server and all attached devices.
Installing the second serial connector
Complete the following steps to install the optional second serial connector needed
to attach more than one external serial device:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables (“Turning
off the server” on page 9); then, remove the server cover (see “Removing the
server left-side cover and bezel (tower model)” on page 55 or “Removing the
server top cover and bezel (rack configuration)” on page 57).
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove the server cover
for more than 30 minutes during this procedure.
3. Remove the optional serial connector knockout on the rear of the server (see
“Cabling the server” on page 106 for external SCSI knockout location).
4. Route one end of the optional serial connector cable to the optional serial
connector (J48) on the system board (see “System-board internal cable
connectors” on page 49 for the location of the optional serial connector); then,
secure the serial connector at the other end of the cable into the serial knockout
hole on the rear of the server.
5. Reinstall the server cover (see “Installing the server bezel and left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 100 or “Installing the server bezel and top cover (rack
configuration)” on page 103).
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
105
6. Reconnect all the devices, power cords, and cables that you disconnected;
then, turn on the server and all attached devices.
Connecting an external device
You can attach additional external options to the input/output (I/O) connectors on
the front and rear of your server. (See “Input/output connectors” on page 108 for
more information.)
Complete the following steps to attach an external device:
1. Review the information in “Installation guidelines” on page 45, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 46, and “Safety information” on page 169.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
3. Follow the instructions that come with the option to prepare it for installation and
to connect it to the server.
Cabling the server
Notes:
1. You must turn off the server before connecting any cables to or disconnecting
any cables from the server.
2. See the documentation that comes with your options for additional cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route cables before you install certain
options.
3. Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with your server and
options. Use these identifiers to connect the cables to the correct connectors.
For example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled “HDD option.”
Two cable-restraint brackets are on the rear of the tower model servers. After you
connect the cables to the selected devices, you can use these cable-restraint
brackets to manage the cable routing. Route the power cords through the
power-cord restraint bracket on the bottom. Route the remaining cables (for
example, the cables that are connected to the I/O ports) through the I/O
cable-restraint bracket on the top.
See the following illustrations for the locations of the input and output connectors on
your server.
Note: The USB 3 connector is on the front of the server.
106
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Keyboard
Mouse
Parallel
Serial
RS-485
(ASM interconnect)
USB 2
USB 1
Video
Ethernet
External SCSI
knockout
2
1
Optional
external
serial
knockout
Keyboard cabling
There is one keyboard port on the back of the server. Connect a keyboard to this
port.
Pointing device cabling
There is one pointing device port on the back of the server. Connect a pointing
device to this port.
Parallel port cabling
There is one parallel port on the back of the server. You can connect a parallel
device to this port.
Serial cabling
Your server has one standard serial port on the back of the server and one optional
serial port (shipped with the server). You can connect a serial devices to these
ports.
Advanced System Management Interconnect cabling
There are two Advanced System Management (ASM) Interconnect ports on the
back of the server. Use these ports to connect the server to a Remote Supervisor
Adapter in a remote server. The ports support full asynchronous RS-485
communication through a daisy-chain cable in half-duplex mode. Both ports have
automatic termination, and either port can be used if your server is at the beginning
or end of an RS-485 network.
Notes:
1. Do not confuse the two ASM Interconnect ports that are next to the video port
with the Gigabit Ethernet port.
2. If you install an optional Remote Supervisor Adapter in your server, use the
RS-485 ports on the Remote Supervisor Adapter and not the integrated RS-485
ports on the back of your server.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
107
USB cabling
There are three USB ports, one on the front and two on the back of the server. You
can connect USB devices to these ports.
Video cabling
There is one video port on the back of the server. Connect a monitor to this port.
Gigabit Ethernet cabling
There is one Ethernet port on the back of the server. Use this port to connect the
server to a LAN.
Note: Do not confuse the Gigabit Ethernet port with the two ASM Interconnect
ports that are next to the video port.
Power cabling
Your server comes with one or two power cords that you can connect to an
uninterruptible power supply or to an external source, such as a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Complete the following steps to attach the power supply power cords:
1. Connect each power-supply cord to one of the system power connectors on the
rear of the server.
2. Plug the other end of each power-supply cord into a properly grounded
electrical outlet or uninterruptible power supply.
Note: Plugging the power-supply cords into electrical outlets might cause the
server to start automatically. This is an acceptable action.
3. See “Turning on the server” on page 8 for detailed information about turning on
the server.
Installing the server in a rack
Detailed cabling instructions for a typical rack server configuration are provided on
the IBM xSeries Documentation CD that come with your server. These instructions
also come with the Tower-to-Rack Conversion Kit.
Input/output connectors
This section provides information about the following I/O ports on your server. Most
of these ports are on the rear of your server.
v One parallel port
v One video port
v One keyboard port
v One auxiliary-device port (pointing device) port
v Two Ultra320 SCSI connectors on the system board
v One serial port (second serial port optional)
v Three Universal Serial Bus (USB) version 1.1 ports (USB 1 and USB 2 on the
rear, USB 3 on the front)
v One Ethernet port
v Two RS-485 (ASM interconnect) ports dedicated to the system service processor
The following illustration shows the I/O port connectors on the rear of your server.
108
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Keyboard
Mouse
Parallel
Serial
RS-485
(ASM interconnect)
USB 2
USB 1
Video
Ethernet
External SCSI
knockout
2
1
Optional
external
serial
knockout
Two cable-restraint brackets are on the tower model on the rear of the server. After
you connect the cables to the selected devices, you can use these cable-restraint
brackets to manage the cable routing. Route the power cords through the
power-cord restraint bracket on the bottom. Route the remaining cables (for
example, the cables that are connected to the I/O ports) through the I/O
cable-restraint bracket on the top.
Parallel port
Your server has one parallel port. This port supports three standard Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1284 modes of operation: Standard
Parallel Port (SPP), Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), and Extended Capability Port
(ECP).
Viewing or changing the parallel-port assignments
You can use the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program to configure the parallel
port as bidirectional; that is, so that data can be both read from and written to a
device. In bidirectional mode, the server supports the ECP and EPP modes.
To view or change the parallel-port assignment:
1. Restart the server and watch the monitor screen.
2. When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Note: The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on the full configuration
menu. If you set two levels of passwords, you must type the
administrator password to access the full configuration menu.
3. From the main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports; then, press Enter.
4. Select the parallel port; then, use the arrow keys to advance through the
available settings.
Note: When you configure the parallel port as bidirectional, use an IEEE
1284-compliant cable. The maximum length of the cable must not exceed
3 meters (9.8 ft).
5. Select Save Settings; then, select Exit Setup to exit from the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
109
Parallel port connector
The following illustration shows the 25-pin, female D-shell parallel-port connector on
the rear of your server. This connector conforms to the industry standard.
1
13
25
14
Video port
Your server comes with an integrated super video graphics array (SVGA) video
controller. This controller is not removable, but you can disable it through the
Configuration/Setup Utility program or by installing a PCI video adapter.
Note: If you install a PCI video adapter, the server BIOS will automatically disable
the integrated video controller.
The following illustration shows the 15-pin analog video connector on the rear of
your server. This connector conforms to the industry standard.
5
1
15
11
Keyboard port
There is one keyboard connector on the rear of your server.
Note: If you attach a standard (non-USB) keyboard to the keyboard connector, the
USB ports and devices will be disabled during the power-on self-test
(POST).
The following illustration shows the keyboard connector on the rear of your server.
This connector conforms to the industry standard for a PS/2® keyboard.
6
5
4
3
2
1
Auxiliary-device (pointing device) port
The system board has one auxiliary-device port that supports a mouse or other
pointing device.
The following illustration shows the auxiliary-device connector on the rear of your
server. This connector conforms to the industry standard for a PS/2 pointing device.
6
5
4
3
2
1
Ultra320 SCSI system-board connectors
Your server has an integrated dual-channel Ultra320 small computer system
interface (SCSI) controller. This controller supports two independent, internal
Ultra320 SCSI channels. The SCSI channel connectors are on the system board.
Each channel supports up to 15 SCSI devices. This controller uses:
110
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Double-transition clocking to achieve up to 320 MB-per-second data-transfer
rates
v Domain name validation to negotiate compatible data-transfer speeds with each
device
v Parity checking to ensure data reliability
v An active terminator for SCSI bus termination
The server comes with one SCSI cable that is connected from the internal SCSI
channel A connector to the standard hot-swap-drive backplane. You can attach
additional internal SCSI devices to the other internal SCSI channel B connector, or
you can use channel B for external SCSI devices. To use channel B for external
SCSI devices, remove the external SCSI knockout from the rear of the server (see
“Cabling the server” on page 106 for external SCSI knockout location) and secure
the free end of an optional channel B cable in the new opening.
If you want to attach external SCSI devices to the server without using the internal
SCSI channel B, you must install an optional SCSI adapter.
Notes:
1. External SCSI devices connected to internal SCSI channel B will operate
asynchronously.
2. If you install a PCI RAID adapter to configure and manage the internal hot-swap
drives, you must move the SCSI cable from the system-board SCSI connector
to an internal channel connector on the RAID adapter (except for the
ServeRAID-5i controller, which uses the system-board integrated SCSI controller
with RAID capabilities). See “Cabling example for a ServeRAID controller” on
page 66 for additional information.
Note: If you install a PCI RAID adapter to configure and manage the internal
hot-swap drives, you must move the SCSI cable from the system-board
SCSI connector to an internal channel connector on the RAID adapter
(except for the ServeRAID-5i controller, which uses the system-board
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities). See “Cabling example for
a ServeRAID controller” on page 66 for additional information.
SCSI cabling requirements
For information about the maximum length of SCSI cable, see the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) SCSI standards on the ANSI Web site at
http://www.ansi.org/ on the World Wide Web. Adhering to these standards will help
to ensure that your server operates properly.
SCSI IDs
Each SCSI device that is connected to a SCSI controller must have a unique SCSI
ID. This ID enables the SCSI controller to identify the device and ensure that
different devices on the same SCSI channel do not attempt to transfer data
simultaneously. SCSI devices that are connected to different SCSI channels can
have duplicate SCSI IDs. Table 8 on page 112 and Table 9 on page 112 list the
SCSI IDs for the hard disk drives and backplanes that are connected to one
channel. In the typical configuration, the standard hard disk drives and backplane
are connected to channel A, and the optional 3-Pack hard disk drives and
backplane are connected to channel B. See “Working with the 3-Pack Ultra320
Hot-Swap Expansion option” on page 70 for instructions for installing the 3-Pack
option, and “Installing internal drives” on page 74 for instructions about installing
hard disk drives.
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
111
Table 8. SCSI IDs for standard hot-swap hard disk drives and backplane
Device
SCSI ID
Drive bay 5
5
Drive bay 4
4
Drive bay 3
3
Drive bay 2
2
Drive bay 1
1
Drive bay 0
0
Backplane
8
Table 9. SCSI IDs for optional 3-Pack hot-swap hard disk drives and backplane
Device
SCSI ID
Drive bay 14
14
Drive bay 13
13
Drive bay 12
12
Backplane
9
The hot-swap-drive backplane controls the SCSI IDs for the internal hot-swap drive
bays. However, when you attach an external SCSI device to an optional SCSI
adapter, you must set a unique ID for the device. See the information that comes
with the device for instructions to set its SCSI ID.
SCSI connectors
The following illustration shows the 68-pin, female D-shell SCSI connectors. These
connectors conform to the SCSI standard.
34
1
68
35
Serial ports
Your server has one standard serial port that the operating system can use and one
optional serial port.
Some application programs require specific ports, and some modems function
properly only at certain communication-port addresses. You might need to use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change communication-port address
assignments to prevent or resolve address conflicts.
Viewing or changing the serial-port assignments
To
1.
2.
3.
view or change the serial-port assignments:
Restart the server and watch the monitor screen.
When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
From the main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports; then, press Enter.
Note: The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on the full configuration
menu. If you set two levels of passwords, you must type the
administrator password to access the full configuration menu.
112
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
4. Select the serial port; then, use the arrow keys to advance through the settings
available.
5. Select Save Settings; then, select Exit Setup to exit from the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Serial-port connectors
The following illustration shows the 9-pin, male D-shell serial-port connector on the
rear of your server. This connector conforms to the industry standard.
5
1
6
9
Universal Serial Bus version 1.1 ports
Your server has one Universal Serial Bus (USB) version 1.1 connector on the front
of the server and two USB version 1.1 connectors on the rear of the server.
USB is a serial interface standard for telephony and multimedia devices. It uses
Plug and Play technology to determine the type of device that is attached to the
connector.
Notes:
1. If you attach a standard (non-USB) keyboard to the keyboard connector, the
USB ports and devices will be disabled during the power-on self-test (POST).
2. If you install a USB keyboard that has a mouse port, the USB keyboard
emulates a mouse, and you will not be able to disable the mouse settings in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
3. Check to make sure that your NOS supports USB devices.
4. For additional information about USB version 1.1 devices, go to
http://www.usb.org/.
USB cables and hubs
You need a 4-pin cable to connect USB devices. If you plan to attach more than
three USB devices, you must use a hub to connect the devices. The hub provides
multiple connectors for attaching additional external USB devices.
USB technology provides up to 12 Mb-per-second (Mbps) speed with a maximum of
127 devices and a maximum cable length of five meters (16 ft).
USB-port connectors
Each USB port has an external connector on the front and rear of the server for
attaching USB compatible devices.
The following illustration shows the USB-port connectors on the front and rear of
your server. These connectors conform to the USB version 1.1 standard.
1
4
Gigabit Ethernet port
Your server comes with an integrated Gigabit Ethernet controller. This controller
provides an interface for connecting to 10-Mbps, 100-Mbps, or 1000-Mbps networks
and provides full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission
and reception of data on the Ethernet local area network (LAN).
Chapter 4. Customer replaceable units
113
To access the Ethernet connector, connect a Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded
twisted-pair (UTP) cable to the Ethernet (RJ-45) connector on the rear of your
server. See “System-board external port connectors” on page 50.
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard and1000BASE-T standard require
that the cabling in the network be Category 5 or higher.
The Ethernet (RJ-45) connector has one LED that indicates Ethernet-link status.
When this green LED is on, there is an active connection on the Ethernet port.
Activity between the server and the network is indicated by the Ethernet
transmit/receive activity LED on the front of the server (see “Operator information
panel” on page 7).
Ethernet connector
There is an RJ-45 Ethernet connector on the back of the server. See “System-board
external port connectors” on page 50 for the location of this connector. The following
illustration shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45 connector. These
assignments apply to both 10BASE-T and 100/1000BASE-TX devices.
8
1
RS-485 (ASM interconnect) ports
The RS-485 connectors are used for the ISMP interconnect function. The ISMP
interconnect function uses these connectors to daisy-chain several system service
processors together. This function enables the service processors to communicate
with each other in half-duplex mode.
114
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units
This chapter describes the removal of server components.
Important: The field replaceable unit (FRU) procedures are intended for trained
servicers who are familiar with IBM xSeries products. See the parts
listing in “System” on page 162 to determine if the component being
replaced is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) or a FRU.
Thermal grease
This section contains information about removing and replacing the thermal grease
between the heat sink and the microprocessor. The thermal grease must be
replaced anytime the heat sink has been removed from the top of the
microprocessor and is going to be reused, or when debris is found in the grease.
Note:
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Complete the following steps to replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease
on the microprocessor and heat sink:
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat
sink.
Note: Be sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.
4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.
Microprocessor
0.01 mL of
thermal grease
5. Use the thermal grease syringe to place 16 uniformly spaced dots of 0.01mL
each on the top of the microprocessor.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
115
Note: 0.01mL is one tick mark on the syringe. If the grease is properly applied,
approximately half (0.22mL) of the grease will remain in the syringe.
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing an
additional microprocessor” on page 83.
System board
Note:
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Attention:
Complete the following steps to remove the system board.
1. Turn off the server and any attached devices.
Notes:
a. When replacing the system board, you must either update the system with
the latest firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer
provides on a diskette or CD image.
b. When replacing the system board in a server designed for 400 MHz
microprocessors, do not install a system board designed for
microprocessors of greater than 400 MHz (see Chapter 7, “Parts listing for
the xSeries 235”, on page 161).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect external cables and option cables from the back of the server.
Lay the server so that the cover is facing up.
Remove the cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
Disconnect and remove adapters and spacers (see “Working with adapters” on
page 60).
6. Remove the two central fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
7. Remove the plastic baffle.
8. Remove the adapter support bracket (see “Removing and installing the
adapter-support bracket” on page 58).
9. Disconnect all cables from the system board.
Note: Place all disconnected cables carefully to the side so that they do not
come in contact with the center of the system board.
10. Remove all microprocessors and VRMs and set them aside on a
static-protected surface for reinstallation (see “Microprocessor removal” on
page 117).
11. Remove the memory modules and set them aside on a static-protected surface
for reinstallation (see “Installing memory modules” on page 80).
Note: When you set the DIMMs aside, be sure to keep track of the slots they
belong to; DIMMs must be installed in pairs of the same size, speed,
116
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
type, and technology.
12. Push the system-board release latch toward the side of the system board
where the DIMM slots are located to release the board.
Note: The board will not be released until the latch is pushed to be
approximately parallel with the DIMM slots.
13. Pull the board carefully out of the server.
14. To reinstall the board, place it carefully into position in the chassis with the
system-board release lever in the open position; then, slide the lever toward
the side of the system board where the adapters are installed until the board is
securely in place.
15. Reverse steps 5 on page 116 through 11 on page 116 to replace the
components that were removed.
Note: When reassembling the components in the server, be sure to route all
cables carefully so that they are not exposed to undue pressure.
Microprocessor removal
Complete the following steps to remove a microprocessor.
Note:
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables; then,
remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
2. Open the cover on the air-baffle assembly.
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units
117
Air-baffle assembly
cover
Note: It might be easier to turn the server on its side and remove the air baffle
to access the microprocessors.
3. Identify the microprocessor to be removed.
4. Remove the heat sink:
a. Loosen one captive screw fully; then, loosen the other captive screw.
Attention: Loosening one screw fully before loosening the other screw will
help to break the thermal bond that adheres the heat sink to the
microprocessor.
b. Pull the heat sink off of the microprocessor.
5. Rotate the locking lever on the microprocessor socket from its closed and
locked position until it stops or clicks in the fully open position (approximately
135° angle), as shown. Then, see the documentation provided with the
microprocessor option for complete installation instructions.
Attention: You must ensure that the locking lever on the microprocessor
socket is in the fully open position before you insert the microprocessor in the
socket. Failure to do so might result in permanent damage to the
microprocessor, microprocessor socket, and system board.
Lever closed
118
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Lever
fully
open
Lever
fully
open
Lever closed
6. Pull the microprocessor out of the socket.
Microprocessor
Microprocessorrelease lever
To install a microprocessor, see “Installing an additional microprocessor” on
page 83.
Operator information panel
Complete the following steps to remove the operator information panel.
Note:
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
1.
2.
3.
4.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Turn off the server and any attached devices.
Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
Remove the front bezel (see “Removing the bezel” on page 56).
5. Disconnect and remove adapters and spacers (see “Working with adapters” on
page 60).
6. Remove the two central fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
7. Remove the plastic baffle.
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units
119
8. Disconnect the operator information panel cable from the system board.
9. From outside the server, push the tab 1 on the panel 2, making sure to
press the tab near the chassis; the panel will disengage from the chassis.
10. Remove the panel, carefully threading the cable past the other components
and through the opening in the chassis.
Note: If the cable has been secured in the cable clamps, gently pull it out of
the clamps before pulling the cable through the opening in the chassis.
11. To install the operator information panel, reverse the previous steps.
Notes:
a. Thread the cable through the opening in the chassis and extend it into the
server before attaching the operator information panel.
b. Secure the cable in the cable clamps along the inside of the chassis.
120
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
c. Fit the left tab (in the rack configuration, this is the top tab) into the lip on
the chassis, and then press on the right tab (in the rack configuration, this
is the bottom tab) until it snaps into place.
Diskette drive
Complete the following steps to remove the diskette drive.
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Turn off the server and all attached devices.
Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
Remove the front bezel (see “Removing the bezel” on page 56).
5. Press in on the two blue diskette drive release tabs until the drive is released
from the chassis.
6. Carefully pull the drive away from the chassis until the cables at the rear of the
drive are accessible.
7. Remove the two cables from the back of the drive and pull the drive out.
8. To replace the diskette drive, reverse the previous steps.
Note: If you are replacing the drive, prepare the new drive for the server with
the following procedure:
a. Remove the side rails from the drive by gently pulling them away
from the drive until they detach.
b. Insert one pin of the rail into the notch near the rear of the drive.
c. Pushing the rail gently toward the rear of the drive, insert the other
pin into the notch near the front of the drive.
d. Press in on the metal strip in the rail to secure the rail to the drive.
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units
121
DASD backplane
Complete the following steps to remove the DASD backplane.
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Turn off the server.
Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Pull out the hard drives.
Remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
5. Remove the two front fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
6. Disconnect and remove adapters and spacers (see “Working with adapters” on
page 60).
7. Remove the two central fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
8. Remove the plastic baffle.
9. Disconnect the DASD cable from the DASD backplane.
10. Press the release latches and pull the backplane out of the server.
11. To replace the DASD backplane, reverse the previous steps, making sure to
place the backplane assembly over the two guide pins on the chassis floor.
122
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Power-supply (non-hot-swap)
Complete the following steps to remove the non-hot-swap power supply.
Note:
v
v
v
1. Turn
Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
off the server.
Note: If your server is a tower model, you might find it easier to install the
hot-swap power-supply option if you turn the server on its side so that
the power supply is on the bottom.
2. Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
3. Remove the adapter-support bracket. See “Removing and installing the
adapter-support bracket” on page 58 for instructions.
4. Remove the fixed power supply (see the following illustration).
1
2
5. Disconnect all power-supply cables from the system board (J4, J10), SCSI
backplane, and other backplanes or devices.
6. From the rear of the server, remove the two screws at each side of the fixed
power supply.
7. Gently pull the power supply from the server, making sure the cables do not
snag on the chassis or system board.
Note: You might need to insert the blade of a screwdriver behind one corner of
the power supply to begin moving it.
8. To install a non-hot-swap power supply option, reverse the previous steps.
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units
123
Front fan housing
Complete the following steps to remove the blower housing.
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Turn off the server.
Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Remove the front bezel (see “Removing the bezel” on page 56).
Remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
5. Remove the two front fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
6. Disconnect and remove adapter cards and spacers (see “Working with
adapters” on page 60).
7. Remove the two central fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
8. Remove the plastic baffle.
9. Remove the DASD backplane (see “DASD backplane” on page 122).
10. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board.
11. Press in the tabs (1) with the tip of a flat-blade screwdriver until the housing
releases and tilts up (2); then, pull the housing out of the two notches on the
front of the chassis and lift (3) the housing out of the server.
12. To replace the blower housing, reverse the previous steps, making sure that
the two tabs are inserted into the notches on the front of the chassis.
124
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Hot-swap card
Complete the following steps to remove the hot-swap card.
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Turn off the server.
Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
Remove all adapters and spacers (see “Working with adapters” on page 60).
5. Disconnect the hot-swap card cable from the system board.
6. Press the two tabs on the hot-swap card and remove it from the chassis.
Note: It might be easier to remove this component if the server is placed on its
side.
7. To replace the hot-swap card, line up the two tabs with the notches on the
chassis and snap the assembly into place; then, connect the cable to the
system board.
Diagnostics panel card
Complete the following steps to remove the diagnostics panel card.
Note:
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units
125
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Turn off the server.
Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
Disconnect and remove adapters and spacers (see “Working with adapters” on
page 60).
5. Remove the two central fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
6. Remove the plastic baffle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7. Disconnect the diagnostics panel card cable from the system board (J23).
8. Grasp the tab on the diagnostics panel card and gently pull up and to the right
until the card assembly releases.
9. To replace the diagnostics panel card, line up the two notches on the left and
snap the assembly into place; then, connect the cable to the system board.
Power reset card
Complete the following steps to remove the power reset card.
Note:
v Read “Installation guidelines” on page 45.
v Read the safety notices at “Safety information” on page 169.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
126
v Read “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices” on page 172.
Turn off the server.
Disconnect all external cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Remove the bezel (see “Removing the bezel” on page 56).
Remove the server cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 55).
Disconnect and remove adapters and spacers (see “Working with adapters” on
page 60).
Remove the two central fans (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page 95).
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
7. Remove the plastic baffle.
8. Disconnect the power reset card cable from the system board (J47).
9. Press the tab on the front of the power reset card and lift it out from inside the
chassis.
10. To replace the power reset card, reverse the previous steps, threading the
cable carefully.
Chapter 5. Service replaceable units
127
128
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
This index supports xSeries 235 servers.
Notes:
1. Check the configuration before you replace a FRU. Configuration problems can
cause false errors and symptoms.
2. For IBM devices not supported by this index, refer to the manual for that device.
3. Always start with “General checkout” on page 29.
The symptom-to-FRU index lists symptoms, errors, and the possible causes. The
most likely cause is listed first. Use this symptom-to-FRU index to help you decide
which FRUs to have available when servicing the computer.
The left-hand column of the tables in this index lists error codes or messages, and
the right-hand column lists one or more suggested actions or FRUs to replace.
Note: Some tables have more than two columns; in those instances, more than
one column on the left is required to describe the error symptom.
Take the action (or replace the FRU) suggested first in the list of the right-hand
column, then try the server again to see if the problem has been corrected before
taking further action.
Note: Try reseating a suspected component or reconnecting a cable before
replacing the component.
The POST BIOS code displays POST error codes and messages on the screen.
Beep symptoms
Beep symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones separated by pauses
(intervals without sound). See the examples in the following table.
Beeps
Description
1-2-3
v One beep
v A pause (or break)
v Two beeps
v A pause (or break)
v Three beeps
4
Four continuous beeps
One beep after successfully completing POST indicates the system is functioning
properly.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Beep/symptom
FRU/action
1-1-2
(Microprocessor register test failed)
1. Optional microprocessor (if installed)
2. Microprocessor
3. System board
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
129
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Beep/symptom
FRU/action
1-1-3
(CMOS write/read test failed)
1. Battery
1-1-4
(BIOS EEPROM checksum failed)
1. Recover BIOS
2. System board
2. System board
1-2-1
v System board
(Programmable Interval Timer failed)
1-2-2
(DMA initialization failed)
v System board
1-2-3
v System board
(DMA page register write/read failed)
1-2-4
(RAM refresh verification failed)
1. DIMM
1-3-1
(first 64K RAM test failed)
v DIMM
2-1-1
(Secondary DMA register failed)
v System board
2-1-2
(Primary DMA register failed)
v System board
2-1-3
(Primary interrupt mask register
failed)
v System board
2-1-4
(Secondary interrupt mask register
failed)
v System board
2-2-1
(Interrupt vector loading failed)
v System board
2-2-2
(Keyboard controller failed)
1. System board
2-2-3
(CMOS power failure and checksum
checks failed)
1. Battery
2-2-4
(CMOS configuration information
validation failed)
1. Battery
2-3-1
(Screen initialization failed)
v System board
2-3-2
(Screen memory failed)
v System board
2-3-3
(Screen retrace failed)
v System board
2-3-4
(Search for video ROM failed)
v System board
2-4-1
(Video failed; screen believed
operable)
v System board
130
2. System board
2. Keyboard
2. System board
2. System board
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Beep/symptom
FRU/action
3-1-1
(Timer tick interrupt failed)
v System board
3-1-2
(Interval timer channel 2 failed)
v System board
3-1-3
(RAM test failed above address
OFFFFH))
1. DIMM
3-1-4
(Time-Of-Day clock failed)
1. Battery
3-2-1
(Serial port failed)
v System board
3-2-2
(Parallel port failed)
v System board
3-2-3
(Math coprocessor test failed)
1. Microprocessor
3-2-4
(Failure comparing CMOS memory
size against actual)
1. DIMM
3-3-1
(Memory size mismatch occurred.)
1. DIMM
3-3-2
(Critical SMBUS error occurred)
1. Disconnect the server power cord from outlet, wait 30 seconds and
retry.
2. System board
2. System board
2. System board
2. Battery
2. Battery
2. System board.
3. DIMMs.
4. DASD backplane.
5. Power supply.
6. Power cage assembly, if installed.
7. 12C Cable.
3-3-3
(No operational memory in system)
1. Install or reseat the memory modules, and then do a 3 boot reset.
(For more information on a 3 boot reset, see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 15.)
2. DIMMs.
3. Memory board.
4. System board.
4-4-4 (Optional system management 1. Verify that the adapter is installed in slot 1.
adapter not installed in slot 1 or not
2. Adapter.
functioning correctly)
3. System board.
Two short beeps
(Information only, the configuration
has changed)
1. Run Diagnostics.
Three short beeps
1. DIMM
2. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. System board
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
131
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Beep/symptom
FRU/action
One continuous beep
1. Microprocessor
2. Optional microprocessor (if installed)
3. System board
Repeating short beeps
1. Keyboard
2. System board
One long and one short beep
1. Video adapter (if installed)
2. System board
One long and two short beeps
1. Video adapter (if installed)
2. System board
One long and three short beeps
1. Monitor
2. Video adapter, if installed
3. System board
Two long and two short beeps
v Video adapter
No-beep symptoms
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
No-beep symptom
FRU/action
No beep and the system
operates correctly.
1. Check speaker cables.
2. Speaker.
3. System board.
No beeps occur after
successfully completing POST
(the power-on status is disabled)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program, and set the Start Options
Power-On Status to enable.
2. Check the speaker connection.
3. System board.
No ac power (power supply ac
LED is off)
1. Check the power cord.
2. Power supply. (If two are installed, swap them to determine if one is
defective.)
3. Power cage assembly.
4. Hot-swap power ac inlet box.
No beep and no video
v See “Undetermined problems” on page 157.
System will not start (power
supply ac LED is on)
v See “Power-supply LED errors” on page 146.
Diagnostic panel system error LED
The system-error LED is lit when an error is detected. If the system-error LED is lit,
remove the cover and check the diagnostic panel LEDs. The following table is a
complete list of diagnostics panel LEDs followed by the FRU or action for correcting
the problem. The information in the table is valid only when the system-error LED is
lit.
132
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Notes:
1. If a diagnostics panel LED is lit and the information LED panel system-error
LED is off, there is probably an LED problem. Run LED diagnostics.
2. To locate the LEDs on the system board, see “System-board LED locations” on
page 53.
3. Check the System Error Log for additional information before replacing a FRU.
4. The DIMM error LEDs, microprocessor error LEDs, and VRM error LEDs turn
off when the system is turned off.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Diagnostics panel LED
FRU/action
All LEDs off
(Check System Error Log for error
condition, then clear System Error
Log when the problem is found.)
1. System Error Log is 75% full; clear the log.
2. PFA alert; check log for failure; clear PFA alert; remove ac power for at
least 20 seconds, reconnect, then turn on the system.
3. Run light path diagnostics.
MEMORY LED on (The LED next
to the failing DIMM is on.)
1. Failing DIMM
CPU LED on (The LED next to the
failing CPU is on.)
1. Microprocessor 1 or 2
PCI BUS LED on
1. Remove all PCI adapters from slots on affected bus (see “LEDs for
Active PCI slots” on page 36 for bus information, see “Adapter
considerations” on page 60).
2. System board
2. System board
2. System board.
VRM LED on (The LED next to the 1. Voltage regulator module indicated by the lit VRM LED.
failing VRM is on.)
2. Microprocessor indicated by the microprocessor LED.
DASD LED on (The LED located
1. Be sure the fans are operating correctly and the airflow is good.
next to the drive bay that the failing
2. If installed, reseat I2C cable between DASD backplane and DASD I2C on
drive is installed in is lit. Check the
the system board (J10).
amber drive LED for the failing hard
3.
Failing drive. SCSI channel A has failed. (This is the SCSI channel for the
drive.)
hot-swap hard disk drives).
4. SCSI backplane.
SERVICE PROCESSOR BUS LED 1. Unplug the server for 30 seconds, and then retry.
2. Reflash or update firmware for ISMP, BIOS.
3. System board.
POWER SUPPLY 1 LED on
1. Check the dc good LED on power supply 1. If it is off, replace power
supply 1.
2. Power cage assembly, if installed.
POWER SUPPLY 2 LED on
1. Check the dc good LED on power supply 2. If it is off, replace power
supply 2.
2. Power cage assembly, if installed.
NONREDUNDANT LED on
1. Check the PS1 and PS2 LEDs and replace any indicated power supply.
2. Install an additional power supply or remove optional devices from the
server.
NMI LED on
1. Restart the server.
2. Check the System Error Log.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
133
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Diagnostics panel LED
FRU/action
TEMPERATURE LED on
1. Ambient temperature must be within normal operating specifications.
See “Features and specifications” on page 3.
2. Ensure fans are operating correctly.
3. Examine System Error Log.
a. System over recommended temperature
v Information LED panel
b. DASD over recommended temperature (DASD LED also on)
1) Overheating hard drive
2) DASD backplane
c. System over recommended temperature for CPU x (where x is 1 or 2)
(CPU LED is also on)
1) CPU x
2) System board
4. If the CPU LED on the diagnostics panel is also lit, one of the
microprocessors has caused the error.
FAN LED on
1. Check individual fan LEDs.
2. Replace respective fan.
3. Fan cable.
4. System board.
5. Power cage assembly, if installed.
Diagnostic error codes
Note: In the following error codes, if XXX is 000, 195, or 197, do not replace a
FRU. The description for these error codes are:
000
The test passed.
195
The Esc key was pressed to stop the test.
197
Warning; a hardware failure might not have occurred.
For all error codes, replace the FRU or take the action indicated.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
001-XXX-000
(Failed core tests)
v System board
001-XXX-001
(Failed core tests)
v System board
001-250-000
(Failed system board ECC)
v System board
001-250-001
(Failed system board ECC)
v System board
005-XXX-000
(Failed video test)
v System board
011-XXX-000
(Failed COM1 serial port test)
v System board
134
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
011-XXX-001
(Failed COM2 serial port test)
v System board
014-XXX-000
(Failed parallel port test)
v System board
015-XXX-001
(USB interface not found, board damaged)
1. System board
015-XXX-015
(Failed USB external loopback test)
1. Make sure the parallel port is not disabled.
2. Run the USB external loopback test again.
3. System board.
015-XXX-198
(USB device connected during USB test)
1. Remove USB devices from USB1 and USB2.
2. Run the USB external loopback test again.
3. System board.
020-XXX-000
(Failed PCI interface test)
v System board
020-XXX-001
(Failed hot-swap slot 1 PCI latch test)
1. PCI hot-swap latch assembly
020-XXX-002
(Failed Hot-swap slot 2 PCI latch test)
1. PCI hot-swap latch assembly
020-XXX-003
(Failed hot-swap slot 3 PCI latch test)
1. PCI hot-swap latch assembly
020-XXX-004
(Failed hot-swap slot 4 PCI latch test)
1. PCI hot-swap latch assembly
030-XXX-000
(Failed internal SCSI interface test)
v System board
035-XXX-099
1. No adapters were found.
2. System board
2. System board
2. System board
2. System board
2. If adapter is installed re-check connection.
035-XXX-S99
(Failed RAID test on PCI slot S. S =
number of failing PCI slot. Check System
Error Log before replacing a FRU.)
1. Adapter
035-XXX-SNN
(Check System Error Log before replacing
a FRU. s = number of failing PCI slot, nn =
SCSI ID of failing fixed disk.)
v Hard disk drive with SCSI ID nnon RAID adapter in PCI slot s.
035-253-S99
(RAID adapter initialization failure)
1. ServeRAID adapter in slot s is not configured properly. Obtain
the basic and extended configuration status and see the ServeRAID
Hardware Maintenance Manual for more information.
2. SCSI backplane
3. Cable
2. Cable.
3. SCSI backplane.
4. Adapter.
075-XXX-000
(Failed power supply test)
v Power supply
089-XXX-001
(Failed microprocessor test)
1. VRM 1 for microprocessor 1
2. Microprocessor 1
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
135
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
089-XXX-002
(Failed optional microprocessor test)
1. VRM 2 for optional microprocessor 2
166-198-000 System Management:
Aborted
(Unable to communicate with ASM. It may
be busy. Run the test again.)
1. Run the diagnostic test again.
2. Optional microprocessor 2
2. Correct other error conditions and retry. These include other failed
system management tests and items logged in the System Error
Log of the optional Remote Supervisor Adapter.
3. Disconnect all server and option power cords from the server, wait
30 seconds, reconnect, and retry.
4. Remote Supervisor Adapter, if installed.
5. System board.
166-201-001 System Management: Failed 1. If installed, reseat the I2C cable between the Remote
(I2C bus error(s) See SERVPROC and
Supervisor Adapter (in PCI slot 1/J32) and the system board
DIAGS entries in event log.)
(J27).
2. Reseat memory DIMMs.
3. Memory DIMMs.
4. System board.
166-201-002 System Management: Failed 1. Reseat I2C cable between the operator information panel and
(I2C bus error(s) See SERVPROC and
the system board (J24).
DIAGS entries in event log.)
2. Reseat I2C cable between the diagnostics panel and the system
board (J23).
3. Operator information panel.
4. Diagnostics panel.
5. System board.
166-201-003 System Management: Failed 1. Reseat cables between the system board and the power supply
(I2C bus error(s) See SERVPROC and
or power cage assembly, if installed.
DIAGS entries in event log.)
2. Power cage assembly, if installed.
3. System board.
166-201-004 System Management: Failed 1. DASD backplane
(I2C bus error(s) See SERVPROC and
2. System board
DIAGS entries in event log.)
166-201-005 System Management: Failed 1. Reseat Memory DIMMs.
(I2C bus error(s) See SERVPROC and
2. Reseat microprocessors.
DIAGS entries in event log.)
3. Memory DIMMs.
4. Microprocessors.
5. System board.
166-250-000 System Management: Failed 1. Reseat I2C cable between the Advanced System Management
(I2C cable is disconnected. Reconnect I2C
Adapter (in PCI slot 1/J32) and the system board (J27).
cable between Remote Supervisor Adapter
2. I2C cables.
and system board.)
3. Advanced System Management adapter.
4. System board.
166-260-000 System Management: Failed 1. Disconnect all server and option power cords from the server,
(Restart ASM Error. After restarting, ASM
wait 30 seconds, reconnect, and retry.
communication was lost. Unplug and cold
2. Reseat the Remote Supervisor Adapter (in PCI slots 1/J32).
boot to reset ASM.)
3. Remote Supervisor Adapter.
136
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
166-342-000 System Management: Failed 1. Ensure the latest firmware levels for Remote Supervisor
(ASM adapter BIST indicate failed tests.)
Adapter and BIOS.
2. Disconnect all server and option power cords from server, wait 30
seconds, reconnect, and retry.
3. Remote Supervisor Adapter.
166-400-000 System Management: Failed 1. Reflash or update firmware for ISMP.
(ISMP self test result failed tests: x where x
2. System board.
= Flash, RAM, or ROM.)
180-XXX-000 (Diagnostics LED failure)
v Run diagnostics panel LED test for the failing LED.
180-XXX-001
(Failed front LED panel test)
1. Operator information panel
180-XXX-002
(Failed diagnostics LED panel test)
1. Diagnostics panel
180-361-003
(Failed fan LED test)
1. Fan(s)
180-XXX-003
(Failed system board LED test)
v System board
180-XXX-005
(Failed SCSI backplane LED test)
1. SCSI backplane
2. System board
2. System board
2. System board
2. SCSI backplane cable
3. System board
201-XXX-0NN
(Failed memory test.)
1. DIMM Location slots 1-6 where nn = DIMM location.
Note: nn 1=DIMM 1; 2=DIMM 2; 3=DIMM 3; 4=DIMM 4; 5=DIMM
5; 6=DIMM 6.
2. System board
201-XXX-999
(Multiple DIMM failure, see error text)
1. See error text for failing DIMMs.
202-XXX-001
(Failed system cache test)
1. VRM 1
202-XXX-002
(Failed system cache test)
1. VRM 2
206-XXX-000
(Failed diskette drive test)
1. Cable
2. System board.
2. Microprocessor 1
2. Microprocessor 2
2. Diskette drive
3. System board
215-XXX-000
(Failed IDE CD-ROM drive test)
1. Re-run test with a different CD-ROM.
2. CD-ROM drive cables.
3. CD-ROM drive.
4. System board.
217-198-XXX
(Could not establish drive parameters)
1. Check cable and termination.
2. SCSI backplane.
3. Hard disk.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
137
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
217-XXX-000
(Failed BIOS hard disk test)
Note: If RAID is configured, the hard disk
number refers to the RAID logical array.
v Hard disk 1
217-XXX-001
(Failed BIOS hard disk test)
Note: If RAID is configured, the hard disk
number refers to the RAID logical array.
v Hard disk 2
217-XXX-002
(Failed BIOS hard disk test)
Note: If RAID is configured, the hard disk
number refers to the RAID logical array.
v Hard disk 3
217-XXX-003
(Failed BIOS hard disk test)
Note: If RAID is configured, the hard disk
number refers to the RAID logical array.
v Hard disk 4
217-XXX-004
(Failed BIOS hard disk test)
Note: If RAID is configured, the hard disk
number refers to the RAID logical array.
v Hard disk 5
217-XXX-005
(Failed BIOS hard disk test)
Note: If RAID is configured, the hard disk
number refers to the RAID logical array
v Hard disk 6
264-XXX-0NN
(Failed tape drive test)
1. Tape cartridge, if user executed the Read/Write Tape Drive test
(failure code of XXX = 256)
2. SCSI or power cable connected to tape drive with SCSI ID nn
3. Tape drive with SCSI ID nn (refer to the Help and Service
Information appendix of the tape drive’s User Guide)
4. System board or SCSI controller (run SCSI controller diagnostic to
determine if the SCSI bus is functioning properly.)
264-XXX-999
(Errors on multiple tape drives, see error
text for more info)
v See error messages/text in the PC Doctor error log for detailed
information on each individual tape drive error.
301-XXX-000
(Failed keyboard test)
v Keyboard
405-XXX-000
(Failed Ethernet test on controller on the
system board)
1. Verify that Ethernet is not disabled in BIOS.
405-XXX-00N
(Failed Ethernet test on adapter in PCI slot
n)
1. Adapter in PCI slot n
415-XXX-000
(Failed Modem test)
1. Cable.
Note: Ensure modem is present and attached to server.
2. System board.
2. System board
2. Modem.
3. System board.
138
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Error symptoms
You can use the error symptom table to find solutions to problems that have definite
symptoms.
If you cannot find the problem in the error symptom charts, go to “Starting the
diagnostic programs” on page 34 to test the computer.
If you have just added new software or a new option and the computer is not
working, complete the following steps before using the error symptom charts:
1. Remove the software or device that you just added.
2. Run the diagnostic tests to determine if the computer is running correctly.
3. Reinstall the new software or new device.
In the following table, if the entry in the FRU/action column is a suggested action,
perform that action; if it is the name of a component, reseat the component and
replace it if necessary. The most likely cause of the symptom is listed first.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
CD-ROM drive problems
Symptom
FRU/action
CD-ROM drive is not
recognized.
1. Verify that:
v
The IDE channel to which the CD-ROM drive is attached (primary or
secondary) is enabled in the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The correct device driver is installed for the CD-ROM drive.
2. Run CD-ROM drive diagnostics.
3. CD-ROM drive.
CD is not working properly.
1. Clean the CD.
2. Run CD-ROM drive diagnostics.
3. CD-ROM drive.
CD-ROM drive tray is not
1. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
working. (The computer must be
opening.
turned on.)
2. Run CD-ROM drive diagnostics.
3. CD-ROM drive.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
139
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Diskette drive problems
Symptom
FRU/action
Diskette drive activity LED stays 1. If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:
on, or the system bypasses the
v The diskette drive is enabled in the Configuration/Setup utility program.
diskette drive.
v The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try another diskette if you have
one.)
v The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.
v The diskette contains the necessary files to start the computer.
v The software program is working properly.
v The cable is installed correctly (in the proper orientation).
2. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, be sure the distance between
monitors and diskette drives is at least 76 mm (3 in.).
3. Run diskette drive diagnostics.
4. Cable.
5. Diskette drive.
6. System board.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Expansion enclosure problems
Symptom
FRU/action
The SCSI expansion enclosure
used to work but does not work
now.
1. Verify that:
v The cables for all external SCSI options are connected correctly.
v The last option in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
v Any external SCSI option is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI
option before turning on the computer.
2. For more information, see your SCSI expansion enclosure documentation.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Hard disk drive problems
Symptom
FRU/action
Not all drives are recognized by 1. Remove the first drive not recognized and try the hard disk drive
the hard disk drive diagnostic
diagnostic test again.
test (Fixed Disk test).
2. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the drive you removed with a
new one.
System stops responding during 1. Remove the hard disk drive being tested when the computer stopped
hard disk drive diagnostic test.
responding and try the diagnostic test again.
2. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test runs successfully, replace the drive you
removed with a new one.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
General problems
Symptom
FRU/action
Problems such as broken cover
locks or indicator LEDs not
working
v Broken CRU/FRU
140
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Intermittent problems
Symptom
FRU/action
A problem occurs only
occasionally and is difficult to
detect.
1. Verify that:
v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the computer and
attached options.
v When the computer is turned on, air is flowing from the rear of the computer
at the fan grill. If there is no airflow, the fan is not working. This causes the
computer to overheat and shut down.
v Ensure that the SCSI bus and devices are configured correctly and that the
last external device in each SCSI chain is terminated correctly.
2. Check t he system error log.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems
Symptom
FRU/action
All or some keys on the
keyboard do not work.
1. Verify that:
v The keyboard cable is securely connected to the system, and the keyboard
and mouse cables are not reversed.
v Both the computer and the monitor are turned on.
2. Keyboard.
3. System board.
The mouse or pointing device
does not work.
1. Verify that:
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected, and that the
keyboard and mouse cables are not reversed.
v The mouse device drivers are installed correctly.
v Both the computer and the monitor are turned on.
2. Mouse or pointing device.
3. System board.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
141
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Memory problems
Symptom
FRU/action
The amount of system memory
displayed is less than the
amount of physical memory
installed.
1. Verify that:
v The memory modules are seated properly.
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration with the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
v All banks of memory on the DIMMs are enabled. The computer might have
automatically disabled a DIMM bank when it detected a problem or a DIMM
bank could have been manually disabled.
2. Check POST error log for error message 289:
v If the DIMM was disabled by a system-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
v If the DIMM was disabled by the user or by POST:
a. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
b. Enable the DIMM.
c. Save the configuration and restart the computer.
3. DIMM.
4. System board.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Microprocessor problems
Symptom
FRU/action
The computer emits a
continuous tone during POST.
(The startup (boot)
microprocessor is not working
properly.)
1. Verify that the startup microprocessor is seated properly.
2. Startup microprocessor.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Monitor problems
Symptom
FRU/action
Testing the monitor.
v See the information that comes with the monitor for adjusting and testing
instructions. (Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests.)
142
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Monitor problems
Symptom
FRU/action
The screen is blank.
1. Verify that:
v The computer power cord is plugged into the computer and a working
electrical outlet.
v The monitor cables are connected properly.
v The monitor is turned on and the Brightness and Contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
v If the computers are C2T chained together, verify that:
– The C2T chain cables are securely connected to the computers.
– The C2T breakout cable is connected properly.
– A computer that is turned on is selected.
Important: In some memory configurations, the 3-3-3 beep code might sound
during POST followed by a blank display screen. If this occurs and the Boot
Fail Count feature in the Start Options of the Configuration/Setup Utility
program is set to Enabled (its default setting), you must restart the computer
three times to force the system BIOS code to reset the CMOS values to the
default configuration (memory connector or bank of connectors enabled).
2. If you have verified these items and the screen remains blank, replace:
a. Monitor
b. Video adapter, if installed
c. System board
Only the cursor appears.
v See “Undetermined problems” on page 157.
The monitor works when you
turn on the computer but goes
blank when you start some
application programs.
1. Verify that:
v The application program is not setting a display mode higher than the
capability of the monitor.
v The primary monitor cable is connected to the C2T device breakout cable.
v You installed the necessary device drivers for the applications.
2. If you have verified these items and the screen remains blank, replace the
monitor.
3. Video adapter.
4. System board.
The screen is wavy, unreadable, 1. If the monitor self-tests show the monitor is working properly, consider
rolling, distorted, or has screen
the location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
jitter.
transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this
happens, turn off the monitor. (Moving a color monitor while it is turned on
might cause screen discoloration.) Then move the device and the monitor at
least 305 mm (12 in.) apart. Turn on the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, be sure the distance between
monitors and diskette drives is at least 76 mm (3 in.).
b. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
c. An enhanced monitor cable with additional shielding is available for the
9521 and 9527 monitors. For information about the enhanced monitor
cable, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
2. Monitor.
3. Video adapter, if installed.
4. System board.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
143
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Monitor problems
Symptom
FRU/action
Wrong characters appear on the 1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the BIOS code with the correct
screen.
language.
2. Monitor.
3. Video adapter, if installed.
4. System board.
No video.
1. Make sure the correct machine is selected, if applicable.
2. Make sure all cables are locked down.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Option problems
Symptom
FRU/action
An IBM option that was just
installed does not work.
1. Verify that:
v The option is designed for the computer (see the ServerProven list on the
World Wide Web at http://www.ibm.com/pc/compat/).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the option.
v The option is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed options or cables.
v You updated the configuration information in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program. Whenever memory or an option is changed, you must update the
configuration.
2. Option you just installed.
An IBM option that used to work 1. Verify that all of the option hardware and cable connections are secure.
does not work now.
2. If the option comes with its own test instructions, use those instructions to test
the option.
3. If the failing option is a SCSI option, verify that:
v The cables for all external SCSI options are connected correctly.
v The last option in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
v Any external SCSI option is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI
option before turning on the computer.
4. Failing option.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Power problems
Symptom
FRU/action
Power switch does not work
and reset button, if supported,
does work.
1. Reseat connector.
2. Power switch card.
3. System board.
144
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Power problems
Symptom
FRU/action
The computer does not turn on.
1. Verify that:
v The power cables are properly connected to the computer.
v The electrical outlet functions properly.
v The type of memory installed is correct.
v If you just installed an option, remove it, and restart the computer. If the
computer now turns on, you might have installed more options than the
power supply supports.
2. Override front panel power button:
a. Disconnect computer power cords.
b. Reconnect power cords.
If computer turns on:
a. Operator information panel
If computer does not turn on:
v System board
3. See “Undetermined problems” on page 157.
The computer does not turn off.
1. Verify whether you are using an ACPI or non-ACPI operating system. If
you are using a non-ACPI operating system:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the system by holding the power-control button for 4 seconds.
c. If computer fails during BIOS POST and power-control button does not
work, remove the AC power cord.
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,
suspect the system board.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Serial port problems
Symptom
FRU/action
The number of serial ports
identified by the operating
system is less than the number
of serial ports installed.
1. Verify that:
v Each port is assigned a unique address by the Configuration/Setup Utility
program and none of the serial ports is disabled.
v The serial-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.
2. Failing serial port adapter.
A serial device does not work.
1. Verify that:
v The device is compatible with the computer.
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
v The device is connected to the correct port (see “Input/output connectors” on
page 108).
2. Failing serial device.
3. Serial adapter, if installed.
4. System board.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
145
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Software problem
Symptom
FRU/action
Suspected software problem.
1. To determine if problems are caused by the software, verify that:
v The computer has the minimum memory needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software.
Note: If you have just installed an adapter or memory, you might have a
memory address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the computer.
v Other software works on the computer.
v The software that you are using works on another system.
If you received any error messages when using the software program, see the
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and
suggested solutions to the problem.
2. If you have verified these items and the problem remains, contact your place of
purchase.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems
Symptom
FRU/action
A USB device does not work.
v Verify that:
– You are not trying to use a USB device during POST if you have a standard
(non-USB) keyboard attached to the keyboard port.
Note: If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached to the keyboard port, the
USB is disabled and no USB device will work during POST.
– The correct USB device driver is installed.
– The operating system supports USB devices.
Power-supply LED errors
Use the information in this section to solve power-supply problems.
Note: The minimum configuration required for the dc good light to be lit is:
v Power supply
v Power cage assembly, if installed.
v System board (set switch 7 of SW1 to bypass the power switch; see
“System-board switches and jumpers” on page 51.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
AC good LED
DC good LED
Description
FRU/action
Off
Off
No power to system or ac
problem.
1. Check ac power to the system.
146
2. Power supply.
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
AC good LED
DC good LED
Description
FRU/action
On
Off
Standby mode or dc
problem.
1. Check system board cable connectors
J4 and J10. Move switch 7 of SW 1 to
bypass power control. If the dc good LED
is lit, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete. Watch the
screen for any POST errors. Check the
System Error Log for any listed problems. If
the system starts with no errors:
a. Power switch assembly
b. System board
2. Remove the adapters and disconnect the
cables and power connectors to all internal
and external devices. Turn on the system.
If the dc good LED is lit, replace the
adapters and devices one at a time until
you isolate the problem.
3. Power supply.
4. Power cage assembly, if installed.
5. System board.
On
On
Power is working properly.
N/A
POST error codes
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
062
(Three consecutive startup failures using
the default configuration.)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Battery.
3. System board.
4. Microprocessor.
101, 102
(System and processor error)
v System board
106
(System and processor error)
v System board
111
(Channel check error)
1. Memory DIMM
114
(Adapter read-only memory error)
1. Failing adapter.
129
(Internal cache error)
1. Microprocessor
151
(Real time clock error)
1. Run diagnostics.
2. System board
2. Run diagnostics.
2. Optional microprocessor (if installed)
2. Battery.
3. System board.
161
(Real time clock battery error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Battery.
3. System board.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
147
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
162
(Device configuration error)
Note: Be sure to load the default settings
and any additional desired settings; then,
save the configuration.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
163
(Real-time clock error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Battery.
3. Failing device.
4. System board.
2. Battery.
3. System board.
164
(Memory configuration changed.)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. DIMM.
3. System board.
175
(Hardware error)
v System board
176
(Computer cover or cable cover was
removed without a key being used)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
177, 178
(Security hardware error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
184
(Power-on password damaged)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
185
(Drive startup sequence information
corrupted)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
186
(Security hardware control logic failed)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
187
(VPD serial number not set.)
1. Set serial number in the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
188
(Bad EEPROM CRC #2)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
189
(An attempt was made to access the
server with invalid passwords)
v Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program, and type the
administrator password.
196, 198, 199
(Microprocessor mismatch)
1. Verify microprocessors are of same type and speed.
201
(Memory test error.) If the server does not
have the latest level of BIOS installed,
update the BIOS to the latest level and
run the diagnostic program again.
1. DIMM
229
(Cache error)
1. Microprocessor
262
(DRAM parity configuration error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. System board.
2. System board.
2. System board.
2. System board.
2. System board.
2. System board.
2. System board.
2. Microprocessor.
2. System board
2. Optional microprocessor (if installed)
2. Battery.
3. System board.
148
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
289
(DIMM disabled by POST or user)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program, if the DIMM was
disabled by the user.
2. Disabled DIMM, if not disabled by user.
301
(Keyboard or keyboard controller error)
1.
303
(Keyboard controller error)
v System board
602
(Invalid diskette boot record)
1. Diskette
Keyboard
2. System board
2. Diskette drive
3. Cable
4. System board
604
(Diskette drive error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and diagnostics.
2. Diskette drive.
3. Drive cable.
4. System board.
605
(Unlock failure)
1. Diskette drive
2. Drive cable
3. System board
662
(Diskette drive configuration error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and diagnostics.
2. Diskette drive.
3. Drive cable.
4. System board.
762
(Coprocessor configuration error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Battery.
3. Microprocessor.
962
(Parallel port error)
1. Disconnect the external cable on the parallel port.
2. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
3. System board.
11XX
(System board serial port 1 or 2 error)
1. Disconnect the external cable on the serial port.
2. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
3. System board.
1301
(I2C cable to front panel not found)
1. Verify operator information panel cable is connected to J24 on
system board.
2. Cable.
3. Front panel
4. Power switch assembly
5. System board
1302
(I2C cable from system board to power on
and reset switches not found)
1. Verify power on and reset switch cable is connected to J23 on
system board.
2. Cable.
3. Power switch assembly
4. System board
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
149
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
1303
(I2C cable from system board to power
backplane not found)
1. Cable
2. Power cage assembly, if installed
3. System board
1304
(I2C cable to diagnostic LED board not
found)
1. Verify Light Path Diagnostics panel cable is connected to J23
on system board.
2. Power switch assembly.
3. System board.
1600
v System board
(The system management processor is not
functioning) Do the following before
replacing a FRU:
1. Ensure that a jumper is not installed
on J34.
2. Remove the ac power to the server,
wait 20 seconds; then, reconnect the
ac power. Wait 30 seconds; then, turn
on the server.
1601
1. Remote Supervisor Adapter, if installed
(The system is able to communicate to the
2. System board
system management processor, but the
system management processor failed to
respond at the start of POST.) Do the
following before replacing a FRU:
1. Remove the ac power to the server,
wait 20 seconds; then, reconnect the
ac power. Wait 30 seconds; then, turn
on the server.
2. Flash update the system management
processor.
1602
(Cable for optional service processor
adapter not installed)
1. Verify that service processor adapter cable is connected to J27
on system board.
1762
(Hard disk configuration error)
1. Hard disk drive.
2. Disconnect all server and option power cords from server, wait 30
seconds, reconnect, and retry.
2. Hard disk cables.
3. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
4. Hard disk adapter.
5. SCSI backplane.
6. System board.
178X
(Fixed disk error)
1. Hard disk cables.
2. Run diagnostics.
3. Hard disk adapter.
4. Hard disk drive.
5. System board.
1800
(No more hardware interrupt available for
PCI adapter)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Failing adapter.
3. System board.
150
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
1962
(Drive does not contain a valid boot
sector)
1. Verify that a startable operating system is installed.
2. Run diagnostics.
3. Hard disk drive.
4. SCSI backplane.
5. Cable.
6. System board.
2400
(Video controller test failure)
1. Video adapter (if installed)
2462
(Video memory configuration error)
1. Video adapter (if installed)
5962
(IDE CD-ROM drive configuration error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. System board
2. System board
2. CD-ROM drive.
3. CD-ROM power cable.
4. IDE cable.
5. System board.
6. Battery.
8603
(Pointing-device error)
1. Pointing device
0001200
(Machine check architecture error)
1. Microprocessor 1
00012000
(Microprocessor machine check)
1. Microprocessor
00019501
(Microprocessor 1 is not functioning check VRM and microprocessor LEDs)
1. VRM 1
2. System board
2. Optional microprocessor 2
2. System board
2. Microprocessor 1
3. System board
00019502
(Microprocessor 2 is not functioning check VRM and microprocessor LEDs)
1. VRM 2
00019701
(Microprocessor 1 failed)
1. Microprocessor 1
00019702
(Microprocessor 2 failed)
1. Microprocessor 2
00180100
(A PCI adapter has requested memory
resources that are not available.)
1. Reorder the adapters in the PCI slots. It is important that your
startup device is positioned early in the startup-device order so
that it is run by POST.
2. Microprocessor 2
2. System board
2. System board
2. Ensure that the PCI adapter and all other adapters are set correctly
in the Configuration/Setup Utility program Utility program. If the
memory resource settings are not correct, change the settings.
3. If all memory resources are being used, you might need to remove
an adapter to make memory available to the PCI adapter. Disabling
the adapter BIOS on the adapter might correct the error. (See the
documentation provided with the adapter.)
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
151
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
00180200
(No more I/O space available for PCI
adapter)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Failing adapter.
3. System board.
00180300
(No more memory (above 1MB for PCI
adapter))
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Failing adapter.
3. System board.
00180400
(No more memory (below 1MB for PCI
adapter))
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. Move the failing adapter to slot 1.
3. Failing adapter.
4. System board.
00180500
(PCI option ROM checksum error)
1. Remove failing PCI card.
00180600
(PCI to PCI bridge error)
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
2. System board.
2. Move the failing adapter to slot 1.
3. Failing adapter.
4. System board
00180700, 00180800
(General PCI error)
1. System board
00181000
(PCI error)
v Adapter
01295085
(ECC checking hardware test error)
1. System board
01298001
(System BIOS installed on this server
does not support level of processor)
1. Ensure all microprocessors have the same cache size.
01298002
(System BIOS installed on this server
does not support level of processor)
1. Ensure all microprocessors have the same cache size.
01298101
(System BIOS installed on this server
does not support level of processor)
1. Ensure all microprocessors have the same cache size.
01298102
(System BIOS installed on this server
does not support level of processor)
1. Ensure all microprocessors have the same cache size.
I9990301
(Hard disk sector error)
1. Hard disk drive
2. PCI card
v System board
2. Microprocessor
2. Microprocessor 1.
2. Microprocessor 2.
2. Microprocessor 1.
2. Microprocessor 2.
2. SCSI backplane
3. Cable
4. System board
I9990305
(Hard disk sector error, no operating
system installed)
152
1. Install operating system to hard disk.
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Error code/symptom
FRU/action
I9990650
(AC power has been restored)
1. Check cable.
2. Check for interruption of power.
3. Power cable.
Service processor error codes
When viewed from POST, service processor error codes will appear in hexadecimal
form (generally beginning with A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, AD, AE, or E1). However,
when viewed from the System Error Log, the messages will appear as text. To
determine a possible error condition for the service processor, see the System Error
Log (see “Viewing error logs from the diagnostic programs” on page 32).
SCSI error codes
Note: If a ServeRAID-5i controller is installed and later removed, you must
re-enable the on-board SCSI controller in using the Configuration/Setup
Utility program (see “Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on
page 15).
Error code
FRU/action
All SCSI Errors One or more of the
following might be causing the problem:
1. External SCSI devices must be turned on before you turn on
the server.
v A failing SCSI device
(adapter, drive, controller)
2. Make sure that the cables for all external SCSI devices are
connected correctly.
v An improper SCSI configuration or SCSI
termination jumper setting
3. If you have attached an external SCSI device to the server, make
sure the external SCSI termination is set to automatic.
v Duplicate SCSI IDs in the same SCSI
chain
4. Make sure that the last device in each SCSI chain is terminated
correctly.
v A missing or improperly installed SCSI
terminator
5. Make sure that the SCSI devices are configured correctly.
v A defective SCSI terminator
v An improperly installed cable
v A defective cable
Temperature error messages
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
DASD Over Temperature
(level-critical; direct access storage device
bay x was over temperature)
v Ensure that the system is being properly cooled; see “System
reliability considerations” on page 45.
DASD Over recommended Temperature
(sensor x)
(level-warning; DASD bay x had over
temperature condition)
v Ensure that the system is being properly cooled; see “System
reliability considerations” on page 45.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
153
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
DASD under recommended temperature
(sensor x) (level-warning; direct access
storage device bay x had under
temperature condition)
v Ambient temperature must be within normal operating
specifications; see “Features and specifications” on page 3.
DASD Over Temperature
(level-critical; sensor for DASD1 reported
temperature over recommended range)
v Ensure system is being properly cooled; see “System reliability
considerations” on page 45.
Power supply x Temperature Fault
(level-critical; power supply x had over
temperature condition)
1. Ensure system is being properly cooled; see “System reliability
considerations” on page 45.
System board is over recommended
temperature
(level-warning; system board is over
recommended temperature)
1. Ensure system is being properly cooled; see “System reliability
considerations” on page 45.
System board is under recommended
temperature
(level-warning; system board is under
recommended temperature)
v Ambient temperature must be within normal operating
specifications; see “Features and specifications” on page 3.
System over temperature for CPU x
(level-warning; CPU x reporting over
temperature condition)
v Ensure system is being properly cooled; see“System reliability
considerations” on page 45.
System under recommended CPU x
temperature (level-warning; system
reporting under temperature condition for
CPU x)
v Ambient temperature must be within normal operating
specifications; see “Features and specifications” on page 3.
2. Replace power supply x
2. Replace the system board.
Fan error messages
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
Fan x failure (level-critical; fan x had a
failure)
1. Check connections to fan x.
Fan x fault (level-critical; fan x beyond
recommended RPM range)
1. Check connections to fan x.
Fan x outside recommended speed
action
1. Replace fan x.
2. Replace fan x.
2. Replace fan x.
Power error messages
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
Power supply x current share fault
(level-critical; excessive current demand on
power supply x)
v Replace power supply x.
154
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
Power supply x DC good fault
v Replace power supply x.
(level-critical; power good signal not detected
for power supply x)
Power supply x temperature fault
v Replace power supply x.
Power supply x removed
v No action required - information only.
Power supply x fan fault (level-critical; fan
fault in power supply x)
v Replace power supply x.
Power supply x 12 V fault (level-critical;
overcurrent condition detected)
v See “Power checkout” on page 40.
Power supply x 3.3 V fault (level-critical;
3.3 V power supply x had an error)
v See “Power checkout” on page 40.
Power supply x 5 V fault (level-critical; 5 V
power supply x had an error)
v See “Power checkout” on page 40.
System running non-redundant power
(level-noncritical; system does not have
redundant power)
1. Add another power supply.
2. Remove options from system.
3. System can continue to operate without redundancy protection if
steps1 and 2 are not followed.
System under recommended voltage for x 1. Check connections to the power subsystem.
(level-warning; indicated voltage supply
2. Power supply.
under nominal value; value for x can be +12,
3. Power cage assembly, if installed.
-12, or +5)
System shutdown
Refer to the following tables when experiencing system shutdown related to voltage
or temperature problems.
Voltage related system shutdown
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
System shutoff due to x current over
max value (level-critical; system drawing
too much current on voltage x bus)
v See “Power checkout” on page 40.
System shutoff due to x V over voltage
(level-critical; system shutoff due to x
supply over voltage)
1. Check the power-supply connectors
2. Power supply.
3. Power cage assembly, if installed.
System shutoff due to x V under voltage 1. Check the power-supply connectors.
(level-critical system shutoff due to x supply
2. Power supply.
under voltage)
3. Power cage assembly, if installed.
System shutoff due to VRM x over
voltage
v Replace VRM x.
System shutoff due to excessive (< 240
VA) loading
1. See “Power checkout” on page 40.
2. Cycle ac on/off.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
155
Temperature related system shutdown
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
System shutoff due to board over
temperature
(level-critical; board is over temperature)
1. Ensure that the system is being properly cooled; see “System
reliability considerations” on page 45″.
System shutoff due to CPU x over
temperature (level-critical; CPU x is over
temperature)
1. Ensure that the system is being properly cooled; see “System
reliability considerations” on page 45.
2. Replace board.
2. Replace CPU x.
System shutoff due to CPU x under
temperature (level-critical; CPU x is under
temperature)
v Ambient temperature must be within normal operating
specifications; see “Features and specifications” on page 3.
System shutoff due to DASD temperature
(sensor x) (level-critical; DASD area
reported temperature outside recommended
operating range)
v Ensure that the system is being properly cooled; see “System
reliability considerations” on page 45.
System shutoff due to high ambient
temperature
(level-critical; high ambient temperature)
v Ambient temperature must be within normal operating
specifications; see “Features and specifications” on page 3.
System shutoff due to system board
under temperature
(level-critical; system board is under
temperature)
v Ambient temperature must be within normal operating
specifications; see “Features and specifications” on page 3.
DASD checkout
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
Hard drive x removal detected
(level-critical; hard drive x has been
removed)
v Information only, take action as appropriate.
Host built-in self test (BIST)
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Message
Action
Host fail
(level-informational; built-in self-test for the
host failed)
1. Reseat the microprocessor.
2. Reseat the VRM.
3. Replace the microprocessor CPU.
156
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Bus fault messages
Note: See “System” on page 162 to determine which components should be replaced by a field service technician.
Bus fault messages
Message Action
Failure reading 12C device.
Check devices on bus 0.
1. If installed, reseat the I2C cable between Remote Supervisor
Adapter (in PCI slot 1/J32) and system board (J45).
2. Memory DIMMs.
3. System board.
Failure reading 12C device.
Check devices on bus 1.
1. Reseat the I2C cable between the operator information panel
and system board (J24).
2. Operator information panel.
3. System board.
Failure reading 12C device.
Check devices on bus 2.
1. Reseat the cable between system board and the power supply
(power cage assembly, if installed) (J10).
2. Power cage assembly, if installed.
3. Power supply.
4. System board.
Failure reading 12C device.
Check devices on bus 3.
1. Reseat the cable between the DASD backplane and connector
(J10) of system board.
2. DASD backplane.
3. System board.
Failure reading I2C device.
Check device on bus 4.
v System board
Undetermined problems
Use the information in this section if the diagnostic tests did not identify the failure,
the devices list is incorrect, or the system is inoperative.
Notes:
1. Damaged data in CMOS can cause undetermined problems.
2. Damaged data in BIOS code can cause undetermined problems.
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies. If the LEDs indicate the power supplies
are working correctly, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Be sure the server is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices (one at a time) until you find the
failure (turn on the server and reconfigure each time):
Any external devices
Surge suppressor device (on the server)
Modem, printer, mouse, or non-IBM devices
Each adapter
Drives
Memory modules (minimum requirement = 256 MB (2 banks of 128 MB
DIMMs))
Note: Minimum operating requirements are:
a. One power supply
b. Power cage assembly, if installed.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
157
c. System board
d. One microprocessor and VRM
e. Memory module (with a minimum of two 128 MB DIMMs)
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following FRUs in the
order listed:
Power supply
Power cage assembly, if installed
System board
Notes:
1. If the problem goes away when you remove an adapter from the system and
replacing that adapter does not correct the problem, suspect the system board.
2. If you suspect a networking problem and all the system tests pass, suspect a
network cabling problem external to the system.
Problem determination tips
Due to the variety of hardware and software combinations that can be encountered,
use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If possible,
have this information available when requesting assistance from Service Support
and Engineering functions.
v Machine type and model
v Microprocessor or hard disk upgrades
v Failure symptom
– Do diagnostics fail?
–
–
–
–
What, when, where, single, or multiple systems?
Is the failure repeatable?
Has this configuration ever worked?
If it has been working, what changes were made prior to it failing?
– Is this the original reported failure?
v Diagnostics version
– Type and version level
v Hardware configuration
– Print (print screen) configuration currently in use
– BIOS level
v Operating system software
– Type and version level
Note: To eliminate confusion, identical systems are considered identical only if
they:
1. Are the exact machine type and models
2. Have the same BIOS level
3. Have the same adapters/attachments in the same locations
4. Have the same address jumpers/terminators/cabling
5. Have the same software versions and levels
6. Have the same diagnostics code (version)
7. Have the same configuration options set in the system
8. Have the same setup for the operation system control files
158
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Comparing the configuration and software set-up between ″working″ and
″non-working″ systems will often lead to problem resolution.
Chapter 6. Symptom-to-FRU index
159
160
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 7. Parts listing for the xSeries 235
This parts listing supports the xSeries 235 (Type 8671).
23
22
20
21
1
19
18
2
3
4
16
17
8
6
7
9
11
13
10
5
12
14
15
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
161
System
Note: Field replaceable units (FRUs) should be serviced only by qualified field
service technicians. Customer replacement units can be replaced by the
customer.
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
7
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
13
13
14
15
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
19
19
20
20
21
22
23
23
23
162
System (xSeries 235, Type 8671, Models 11X, 1AX, 21X, 2AX, 31X,
3AX, 41X, 4AX, 61X, 6AX, 6BX, 71X, 7AX, 7BX)
Diskette drive (all models)
Filler, hard disk drive (all models)
Operator information panel (all models)
Bezel, front (all models)
Door assembly (all models)
CD-ROM drive, 48X (primary) (all models)
CD-ROM drive, 48X (alternate) (all models)
CD-ROM drive, 48X (alternate) (all models)
CD-ROM drive, 48X (alternate) (all models)
Power reset card (all models)
Diagnostics panel card (all models)
System board assembly (models 11X 1AX 21X 2AX 31X 3AX 41X
4AX)
System board assembly (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
Front fan housing (all models)
Fan assembly (all models)
DASD backplane with carrier assembly (all models)
Guide, fan/card assembly (models 11X 1AX 21X 2AX 31X 3AX 41X
4AX)
Guide, fan/card assembly (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
Guide, fan/card assembly (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
Baffle (all models)
Cover, I cover (all models)
Fan assembly, 92 mm (all models)
Microprocessor, 1.8-0K-L3 (models 11X 1AX)
Microprocessor, 2.0-0K-L3 (models 21X 2AX)
Microprocessor, 2.2-0K-L3 (models 31X 3AX)
Microprocessor, 2.4-0K-L3 (models 41X 4AX)
Microprocessor, 533/2.67-512 (models 61X 6AX 6BX)
Microprocessor, 533/2.8-512 (models 71X 7AX 7BX)
Heat sink (all models)
VRM, 9.1 (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
VRM, 9.05 (models 11X 1AX 21X 2AX 31X 3AX 41X 4AX)
Memory, 256 MB (models 1AX 2AX 3AX 4AX 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX
7BX)
Memory, 128 MB (models 11X 21X 31X 41X)
Baffle (all models)
Fan, rear, hot-swap (all models)
Power supply, 560 W redundant (models 1AX 2AX 3AX 4AX 6AX 6BX
7AX 7BX)
Power supply, 560 W entry (models 61X 71X)
Power supply, 560 W entry (models 11X 21X 31X 41X)
Power supply cage (models 6AX 6BX 7AX 7BX)
Hard disk drive, 36 G SCSI (models 6BX 7BX)
SCSI (RAID) card (models 6BX 7BX)
Foot, chassis (all models)
Filler, diskette drive (all models)
Cover, L cover (all models)
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
FRU No.
76H4091
06P6245
59P5808
59P4167
24P0615
33P3203
33P3215
33P3211
33P3207
25P3306
21P9728
02R2384
CRU/FRU
CRU
CRU
FRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
FRU
FRU
FRU
71P8037
00N6409
09N7499
02R1872
59P4159
FRU
FRU
CRU
FRU
CRU
59P4238
02R9322
59P4160
21P9660
09N9474
24P3525
25P2671
32P8582
37L3570
59P4840
59P4845
25P6309
49P2010
49P2129
09N4306
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
FRU
FRU
FRU
FRU
FRU
FRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
09N4305
24P1284
21P9707
49P2038
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
49P2139
49P2028
49P2157
06P5778
02R0970
02R9308
00N6407
21P9665
FRU
FRU
FRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
Index
System (xSeries 235, Type 8671, Models 11X, 1AX, 21X, 2AX, 31X,
3AX, 41X, 4AX, 61X, 6AX, 6BX, 71X, 7AX, 7BX)
Slide, diskette drive (all models)
Hot-swap card assembly (all models)
Lock assembly (all models)
Power cage assembly (models 1AX 2AX 3AX 4AX)
Clip, VRM (all models)
Slide, DASD (all models)
Mouse assembly (all models)
Battery, 3.0 volt (8590) (all models)
Bracket, tape backup (all models)
Thermal grease kit (all models)
Alcohol wipe kit (all models)
System service label (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
System service label (all models)
Miscellaneous parts kit (all models) (contains: light pipes (4); EMC
clips (5); 3.5 x 10 phillips screws (10); 3 x 8 Plastite screws (10);
self-tap screws (5); power switch cover (2); diskette cable clamp (5);
LED cable clamp (5); 3 x 10 screws (5); EMC springs (20); bumper
feet (6); 8-16 Plastite screws (10); sire retainer links (2); serial number
mount brackets (2); I/O blank tab brackets (5); card retainer latches
(5); clamp assemblies (2); bezel (1); tape mounting kit (2); shadowbox
shield (1); 3 x 3.6 screws (10); I cover latch spring (2); I cover latch
pawl (2); shaft standoff (10); slotted 3.5 screws (10))
Power cord (all models)
Cable, SCSI, 15.75 in (all models)
Cable, SCSI 10 in (all models)
Cable, SCSI 1-drop (all models)
Cable, IDE 2-drop (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
Cable, serial (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
Cable, blower (all models)
Cable, rear fan (all models)
Cable, fan (all models)
Cable, switch CD (all models)
Cable, single USB (all models)
Cable, IDE, CD-ROM drive (all models)
Cable, diskette drive (all models)
Cable, fan power, rear (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
Cable, fan power, center (models 61X 6AX 6BX 71X 7AX 7BX)
Rack slide (optional)
FRU No.
00N6413
21P9672
00N6393
49P2025
31P6026
00N6412
24P0383
33F8354
12J5681
59P4740
59P4739
02R9329
59P4225
59P4204
CRU/FRU
CRU
FRU
FRU
CRU
CRU
FRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
FRU
FRU
CRU
CRU
FRU
6952300
59P4201
59P4199
21P9703
02R9317
02R2061
37L6063
21P9681
21P9684
21P9685
21P9687
24P5085
24P5069
02R9301
02R9307
02R9312
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
CRU
Keyboard CRUs
Keyboard
US English
French Canadian
LA Spanish
Arabic
Belgium/French
Belgium/UK
Bulgarian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
French
CRU No.
37L2551
37L2552
37L2553
37L2555
37L2556
37L2557
37L2558
37L2559
37L2560
37L2561
37L2562
Chapter 7. Parts listing for the xSeries 235
163
Keyboard
German
Greek
Hebrew
Hungarian
Korean
Iceland
Italy
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
Romanian
Russian
Serbian/Cyrillic
Slavic
Spanish
Swedish/Finn
Swiss, French/German
Turkish
Turkish
UK English
Yugosl/Lat
US English-EMEA
Chinese/US
Thailand
French Canadian
CRU No.
37L2563
37L2564
37L2565
37L2566
02K0901
37L2567
37L2568
37L2569
37L2570
37L2571
37L2572
37L2573
37L2574
37L2575
37L2576
37L2577
37L2578
37L2579
37L2580
37L2581
37L2582
37L2583
37L2585
37L2587
37L0913
Power cord CRUs
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and
plug with a properly grounded outlet.
IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.
IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.
164
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Power cord
Argentina, Australia, China (PRC), New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, Paraguay, Uruguay,
Western Samoa
Afghanistan, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Austria, Belgium, Benin, Bulgaria, Burkina Faso,
Burundi, Cameroon, Central African Rep., Chad, China (Macau S.A.R.), Czech Republic,
Egypt, Finland, France, French Guiana, Germany, Greece, Guinea, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast, Jordan, Lebanon, Luxembourg, Malagasy, Mali, Martinique,
Mauritania, Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco, Mozambique, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger,
Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Senegal, Slovakia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Syria, Togo,
Tunisia, Turkey, former USSR, Vietnam, former Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe
Denmark
Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka
Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Channel Islands, China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), Cyprus, Dubai, Fiji,
Ghana, India, Iraq, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Nepal, Nigeria,
Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, United Kingdom, Yemen,
Zambia
Liechtenstein, Switzerland
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, Somalia
Israel
Thailand
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman Islands, Colombia, Costa
Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Korea (South), Liberia, Mexico, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama,
Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad (West Indies), United States of
America, Venezuela
CRU No.
13F9940
13F9979
13F9997
14F0015
14F0033
14F0051
14F0069
14F0087
1838574
6952301
Chapter 7. Parts listing for the xSeries 235
165
166
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. This appendix contains information about where to go for additional
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem
with your xSeries or IntelliStation® system, and whom to call for service, if it is
necessary.
Before you call
Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system is turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system.
v Go to the IBM Support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/ to check for
technical information, hints, tips, and new device drivers.
v Use an IBM discussion forum on the IBM Web site to ask questions.
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the online help or in the
publications that are provided with your system and software. The information that
comes with your system also describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform.
Most xSeries and IntelliStation systems, operating systems, and programs come
with information that contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error
messages and error codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the information
for the operating system or program.
Using the documentation
Information about your IBM xSeries or IntelliStation system and preinstalled
software, if any, is available in the documentation that comes with your system.
That documentation includes printed books, online books, readme files, and help
files. See the troubleshooting information in your system documentation for
instructions for using the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or
the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device
drivers or other software. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you
can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
To access these pages, go to http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/ and follow the
instructions. Also, you can order publications through the IBM Publications Ordering
System at
http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/public/applications/publications/cgibin/pbi.cgi.
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web
On the World Wide Web, the IBM Web site has up-to-date information about IBM
xSeries and IntelliStation products, services, and support. The address for IBM
xSeries information is http://www.ibm.com/eserver/xseries/. The address for IBM
IntelliStation information is http://www.ibm.com/pc/intellistation/.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
167
You can find service information for your IBM products, including supported options,
at http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/.
Software service and support
Through IBM Support Line, you can get telephone assistance, for a fee, with usage,
configuration, and software problems with xSeries servers, IntelliStation
workstations, and appliances. For information about which products are supported
by Support Line in your country or region, go to
http://www.ibm.com/services/sl/products/.
For more information about Support Line and other IBM services, go to
http://www.ibm.com/services/, or go to http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support
telephone numbers. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).
Hardware service and support
You can receive hardware service through IBM Integrated Technology Services or
through your IBM reseller, if your reseller is authorized by IBM to provide warranty
service. Go to http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support telephone numbers, or in
the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378).
In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.
168
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
Note: The service procedures are designed to help you isolate problems. They are
written with the assumption that you have model-specific training on all
computers, or that are familiar with the computers, functions, terminology,
and service information provided in this manual.
Safety information
The following section contains the safety information that you need to be familiar
with before servicing an IBM computer.
General safety
Follow these rules to ensure general safety:
v Observe good housekeeping in the area of the machines during and after
maintenance.
v When lifting any heavy object:
1. Ensure you can stand safely without slipping.
2. Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
3. Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you attempt to
lift.
4. Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles; this action removes
the strain from the muscles in your back. Do not attempt to lift any objects
that weigh more than 16 kg (35 lb) or objects that you think are too heavy for
you.
v Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the customer, or that makes
the equipment unsafe.
v Before you start the machine, ensure that other service representatives and the
customer’s personnel are not in a hazardous position.
v Place removed covers and other parts in a safe place, away from all personnel,
while you are servicing the machine.
v Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that other people will not trip over
it.
v Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the moving parts of a machine.
Ensure that your sleeves are fastened or rolled up above your elbows. If your
hair is long, fasten it.
v Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing or fasten it with a
nonconductive clip, approximately 8 centimeters (3 inches) from the end.
v Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses, or metal fasteners for your
clothing.
Remember: Metal objects are good electrical conductors.
v Wear safety glasses when you are: hammering, drilling soldering, cutting wire,
attaching springs, using solvents, or working in any other conditions that might be
hazardous to your eyes.
v After service, reinstall all safety shields, guards, labels, and ground wires.
Replace any safety device that is worn or defective.
v Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the machine to the customer.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
169
Electrical safety
CAUTION:
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables can be
hazardous. To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, disconnect the
attached power cords, telecommunication systems, networks, and modems
before you open the server covers, unless instructed otherwise in the
installation and configuration procedures.
Observe the following rules when working on electrical equipment.
Important: Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have
handles covered with a soft material that does not insulate you when
working with live electrical currents.
Many customers have, near their equipment, rubber floor mats that
contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharges. Do
not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Find the room emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or
electrical outlet. If an electrical accident occurs, you can then operate the switch
or unplug the power cord quickly.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Disconnect all power before:
– Performing a mechanical inspection
– Working near power supplies
– Removing or installing main units
v Before you start to work on the machine, unplug the power cord. If you cannot
unplug it, ask the customer to power-off the wall box that supplies power to the
machine and to lock the wall box in the off position.
v If you need to work on a machine that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
– Ensure that another person, familiar with the power-off controls, is near you.
Remember: Another person must be there to switch off the power, if
necessary.
– Use only one hand when working with powered-on electrical equipment; keep
the other hand in your pocket or behind your back.
Remember: There must be a complete circuit to cause electrical shock. By
observing the above rule, you may prevent a current from passing through
your body.
– When using testers, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
– Stand on suitable rubber mats (obtained locally, if necessary) to insulate you
from grounds such as metal floor strips and machine frames.
Observe the special safety precautions when you work with very high voltages;
these instructions are in the safety sections of maintenance information. Use
extreme care when measuring high voltages.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition.
170
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Do not use worn or broken tools and testers.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. First, check that
it has been powered-off.
v Always look carefully for possible hazards in your work area. Examples of these
hazards are moist floors, nongrounded power extension cables, power surges,
and missing safety grounds.
v Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective surface of a plastic dental
mirror. The surface is conductive; such touching can cause personal injury and
machine damage.
v Do not service the following parts with the power on when they are removed from
their normal operating places in a machine:
– Power supply units
– Pumps
– Blowers and fans
– Motor generators
and similar units. (This practice ensures correct grounding of the units.)
v If
–
–
–
an electrical accident occurs:
Use caution; do not become a victim yourself.
Switch off power.
Send another person to get medical aid.
Safety inspection guide
The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in identifying potentially unsafe
conditions on these products. Each machine, as it was designed and built, had
required safety items installed to protect users and service personnel from injury.
This guide addresses only those items. However, good judgment should be used to
identify potential safety hazards due to attachment of non-IBM features or options
not covered by this inspection guide.
If any unsafe conditions are present, you must determine how serious the apparent
hazard could be and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem.
Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power (primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock).
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or bulging capacitor
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware
The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a checklist. Begin the checks
with the power off, and the power cord disconnected.
Checklist:
1. Check exterior covers for damage (loose, broken, or sharp edges).
2. Turn off the computer. Disconnect the power cord.
3. Check the power cord for:
a. A third-wire ground connector in good condition. Use a meter to measure
third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between the external ground
pin and frame ground.
Appendix B. Related service information
171
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
b. The power cord should be the appropriate type as specified in the parts
listings.
c. Insulation must not be frayed or worn.
Remove the cover.
Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,
contamination, water or other liquids, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
Check that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not been
removed or tampered with.
Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices
Any computer part containing transistors or integrated circuits (ICs) should be
considered sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). ESD damage can occur when
there is a difference in charge between objects. Protect against ESD damage by
equalizing the charge so that the server, the part, the work mat, and the person
handling the part are all at the same charge.
Notes:
1. Use product-specific ESD procedures when they exceed the requirements noted
here.
2. Make sure that the ESD-protective devices you use have been certified (ISO
9000) as fully effective.
When handling ESD-sensitive parts:
v Keep the parts in protective packages until they are inserted into the product.
v Avoid contact with other people.
v Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to eliminate static on your body.
v Prevent the part from touching your clothing. Most clothing is insulative and
retains a charge even when you are wearing a wrist strap.
v Use the black side of a grounded work mat to provide a static-free work surface.
The mat is especially useful when handling ESD-sensitive devices.
v Select a grounding system, such as those in the following list, to provide
protection that meets the specific service requirement.
Note: The use of a grounding system is desirable but not required to protect
against ESD damage.
– Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground, ground braid, or green-wire
ground.
– Use an ESD common ground or reference point when working on a
double-insulated or battery-operated system. You can use coax or
connector-outside shells on these systems.
– Use the round ground-prong of the ac plug on ac-operated computers.
Grounding requirements
Electrical grounding of the computer is required for operator safety and correct
system function. Proper grounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by a
certified electrician.
172
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Safety notices (multilingual translations)
The caution and danger safety notices in this section are provided in the following
languages:
v English
v Brazilian/Portuguese
v Chinese
v French
v German
v Italian
v Japanese
v Korean
v Spanish
Important: All caution and danger statements in this IBM documentation begin with
a number. This number is used to cross reference an English caution or
danger statement with translated versions of the caution or danger
statement in this section.
For example, if a caution statement begins with a number 1,
translations for that caution statement appear in this section under
statement 1.
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements before performing
any of the instructions.
v Statement 1
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone and communication cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or
reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this
product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural
damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and
modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the
installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when installing,
moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices.
To Connect
To Disconnect
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn everything OFF.
First, attach all cables to devices.
Attach signal cables to connectors.
Attach power cords to outlet.
Turn device ON.
Turn everything OFF.
First, remove power cords from outlet.
Remove signal cables from connectors.
Remove all cables from devices.
v Statement 2
Appendix B. Related service information
173
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a
module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made
by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not
properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
v Statement 3
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD-ROM drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result
in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the
device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DANGER: Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following:
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with
optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.
v Statement 4
≥18 kg (37 lbs)
≥32 kg (70.5 lbs)
CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.
≥55 kg (121.2 lbs)
v Statement 5
174
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do
not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have
more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure
that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.
2
1
v Statement 10
CAUTION:
Do not place any object weighing more than 82 kg (180 lbs.) on top of rack-mounted
devices.
Appendix B. Related service information
175
Importante:
Todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo da IBM documentation começam com um
número. Este número é utilizado para fazer referência cruzada de uma instrução de
cuidado ou perigo no idioma inglês com as versões traduzidas das instruções de
cuidado ou perigo encontradas nesta seção.
Por exemplo, se uma instrução de cuidado é iniciada com o número 1, as
traduções para aquela instrução de cuidado aparecem nesta seção sob a instrução
1.
Certifique-se de ler todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de executar
qualquer operação.
v Instrução 1
PERIGO
A corrente elétrica proveniente de cabos de alimentação, de telefone e de comunicações é
perigosa.
Para evitar risco de choque:
v Não conecte ou desconecte cabos e não realize instalação, manutenção ou
reconfiguração deste produto durante uma tempestade com raios.
v Conecte todos os cabos de alimentação a tomadas elétricas corretamente instaladas e
aterradas.
v Conecte todos os equipamentos ao qual esse produto será conectado a tomadas
corretamente instaladas.
v Sempre que possível, utilize apenas uma das mãos para conectar ou desconectar cabos
de sinal.
v Nunca ligue qualquer equipamento quando existir evidência de danos por fogo, água ou
na estrutura.
v Desconecte cabos de alimentação, sistemas de telecomunicação, redes e modems antes
de abrir as tampas dos dispositivos, a menos que especificado de maneira diferente nos
procedimentos de instalação e configuração.
v Conecte e desconecte cabos conforme descrito na seguinte tabela, ao instalar ou
movimentar este produto ou os dispositivos conectados, ou ao abrir suas tampas.
Para Conectar:
Para Desconectar:
1. DESLIGUE Tudo.
2. Primeiramente, conecte todos os cabos
aos dispositivos.
3. Conecte os cabos de sinal aos
conectores.
4. Conecte os cabos de alimentação às
tomadas.
5. LIGUE os dispositivos.
1. DESLIGUE Tudo.
2. Primeiramente, remova os cabos de
alimentação das tomadas.
3. Remova os cabos de sinal dos
conectores.
4. Remova todos os cabos dos dispositivos.
v Instrução 2
176
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
CUIDADO:
Ao substituir a bateria de lítio, utilize apenas uma bateria IBM, Número de Peça 33F8354
ou uma bateria de tipo equivalente, recomendada pelo fabricante. Se o seu sistema possui
um móídulo com uma bateria de lítio, substitua-o apenas pelo mesmo tipo de mídulo, do
mesmo fabricante. A bateria contém lítio e pode explodir se não for utilizada, manuseada e
descartada de maneira correta.
Não:
v Jogue ou coloque na água
v Aqueça a mais de 100°C (212°F)
v Conserte nem desmonte
Para descartar a bateria, entre em contato com a área de atendimento a clientes IBM, pelo
telefone (011) 889-8986, para obter informações sobre como enviar a bateria pelo correio
para a IBM.
v Instrução 3
PRECAUCIÓN:
Quando produtos a laser (unidades de CD-ROM, unidades de DVD, dispositivos de fibra
ítica, transmissores, etc.) estiverem instalados, observe o seguinte:
v Não remova as tampas. A remoção das tampas de um produto a laser pode resultar em
exposição prejudicial à radiação de laser. Nenhuma peça localizada no interior do
dispositivo pode ser consertada.
v A utilização de controles ou ajustes ou a execução de procedimentos diferentes dos
especificados aqui pode resultar em exposição prejudicial à radiação.
PERIGO
Alguns produtos a laser contêm um diodo laser da Classe 3A ou Classe 3B embutido.
Observe o seguinte:
Radiação de laser quando aberto. Não olhe diretamente para o raio a olho nu ou com
instrumentos íticos, e evite exposição direta ao raio.
Appendix B. Related service information
177
v Instrução 4
≥18 kg (37 lbs)
CUIDADO:
≥32 kg (70.5 lbs)
≥55 kg (121.2 lbs)
Ao levantar a máquina, faça-o com segurança.
v Instrução 5
CUIDADO:
Os botões Liga/Desliga localizados no dispositivo e na fonte de alimentação não desligam a
corrente elétrica fornecida ao dispositivo. O dispositivo também pode ter mais de um cabo
de alimentação. Para remover toda a corrente elétrica do dispositivo, assegure que todos
os cabos de alimentação estejam desconectados da fonte de energia elétrica.
2
1
v Instrução 10
CUIDADO:
Não coloque nenhum objeto com peso superior a 82 kg (180 lbs.) sobre dispositivos
montados em rack.
178
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
179
180
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
181
182
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
183
184
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
185
Important:
Toutes les consignes Attention et Danger indiquées dans la bibliothèque IBM
documentation sont précédées d’un numéro. Ce dernier permet de mettre en
correspondance la consigne en anglais avec ses versions traduites dans la
présente section.
Par exemple, si une consigne de type Attention est précédée du chiffre 1, ses
traductions sont également précédées du chiffre 1 dans la présente section.
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type Attention et Danger avant de
procéder aux opérations décrites par les instructions.
v Notice n° 1
DANGER
Le courant électrique passant dans les câbles de communication, ou les cordons
téléphoniques et d’alimentation peut être dangereux.
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique:
v Ne manipulez aucun câble et n’effectuez aucune opération d’installation, d’entretien ou de
reconfiguration de ce produit au cours d’un orage.
v Branchez tous les cordons d’alimentation sur un socle de prise de courant correctement
câblé et mis à la terre.
v Branchez sur des socles de prise de courant correctement câblés tout équipement
connecté à ce produit.
v Lorsque cela est possible, n’utilisez qu’une seule main pour connecter ou déconnecter les
câbles d’interface.
v Ne mettez jamais un équipement sous tension en cas d’incendie ou d’inondation, ou en
présence de dommages matériels.
v Avant de retirer les carters de l’unité, mettez celle-ci hors tension et déconnectez ses
cordons d’alimentation, ainsi que les câbles qui la relient aux réseaux, aux systèmes de
télécommunication et aux modems (sauf instruction contraire mentionnée dans les
procédures d’installation et de configuration).
v Lorsque vous installez ou que vous déplacez le présent produit ou des périphériques qui
lui sont raccordés, reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous pour connecter et
déconnecter les différents cordons.
Connexion
Déconnexion
1. Mettez les unités hors tension.
1. Mettez les unités hors tension.
2. Commencez par brancher tous les
cordons sur les unités.
2. Débranchez les cordons d’alimentation
des prises.
3. Branchez les câbles d’interface sur des
connecteurs.
3. Débranchez les câbles d’interface des
connecteurs.
4. Branchez les cordons d’alimentation sur
des prises.
4. Débranchez tous les câbles des unités.
5. Mettez les unités sous tension.
186
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Notice n° 2
ATTENTION:
Remplacez la pile au lithium usagée par une pile de référence identique
exclusivement - voir la référence IBM - ou par une pile équivalente recommandée par
le fabricant. Si votre système est doté d’un module contenant une pile au lithium,
vous devez le remplacer uniquement par un module identique, produit par le même
fabricant. La pile contient du lithium et présente donc un risque d’explosion en cas
de mauvaise manipulation ou utilisation.
v Ne la jetez pas à l’eau.
v Ne l’exposez pas à une température supérieure à 100 °C.
v Ne cherchez pas à la réparer ou à la démonter.
Pour la mise au rebut, reportez-vous à la réglementation en vigueur.
v Notice n° 3
ATTENTION:
Si des produits laser sont installés (tels que des unités de CD-ROM ou de DVD, des
périphériques contenant des fibres optiques ou des émetteurs-récepteurs), prenez
connaissance des informations suivantes:
v N’ouvrez pas ces produits pour éviter une exposition directe au rayon laser. Vous
ne pouvez effectuer aucune opération de maintenance à l’intérieur.
v Pour éviter tout risque d’exposition au rayon laser, respectez les consignes de
réglage et d’utilisation des commandes, ainsi que les procédures décrites dans le
présent document.
DANGER
Certains produits laser contiennent une diode laser de classe 3A ou 3B. Prenez
connaissance des informations suivantes:
Rayonnement laser lorsque le carter est ouvert. évitez de regarder fixement le
faisceau ou de l’observer à l’aide d’instruments optiques. évitez une exposition
directe au rayon.
Appendix B. Related service information
187
v Notice n° 4
≥18 kg (37 lbs)
ATTENTION:
≥32 kg (70.5 lbs)
≥55 kg (121.2 lbs)
Faites-vous aider pour soulever ce produit.
v Notice n° 5
ATTENTION:
Le bouton de mise sous tension/hors tension de l’unité et l’interrupteur d’alimentation
du bloc d’alimentation ne coupent pas l’arrivée de courant électrique à l’intérieur de
la machine. Il se peut que votre unité dispose de plusieurs cordons d’alimentation.
Pour isoler totalement l’unité du réseau électrique, débranchez tous les cordons
d’alimentation des socles de prise de courant.
2
1
v Notice n° 10
ATTENTION:
Ne posez pas d’objet dont le poids dépasse 82 kg sur les unités montées en armoire.
188
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Wichtig:
Alle Sicherheitshinweise in dieser IBM documentation beginnen mit einer Nummer.
Diese Nummer verweist auf einen englischen Sicherheitshinweis mit den
übersetzten Versionen dieses Hinweises in diesem Abschnitt.
Wenn z. B. ein Sicherheitshinweis mit der Nummer 1 beginnt, so erscheint die
übersetzung für diesen Sicherheitshinweis in diesem Abschnitt unter dem Hinweis
1.
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine Anweisung ausführen.
v Hinweis 1
VORSICHT
Elektrische Spannungen von Netz-, Telefon- und Datenübertragungsleitungen sind
gefährlich.
Aus Sicherheitsgründen:
v Bei Gewitter an diesem Gerät keine Kabel anschließen oder lösen. Ferner keine
Installations-, Wartungs- oder Rekonfigurationsarbeiten durchführen.
v Gerät nur an eine Schutzkontaktsteckdose mit ordnungsgemäß geerdetem Schutzkontakt
anschließen.
v Alle angeschlossenen Geräte ebenfalls an Schutzkontaktsteckdosen mit ordnungsgemäß
geerdetem Schutzkontakt anschließen.
v Signalkabel möglichst einhändig anschließen oder lösen.
v Keine Geräte einschalten, wenn die Gefahr einer Beschädigung durch Feuer, Wasser
oder andere Einflüsse besteht.
v Die Verbindung zu den angeschlossenen Netzkabeln, Telekommunikationssystemen,
Netzwerken und Modems ist vor dem öffnen des Gehäuses zu unterbrechen. Es sei
denn, dies ist in den zugehörigen Installations- und Konfigurationsprozeduren anders
angegeben.
v Nur nach den nachfolgend aufgeführten Anweisungen arbeiten, die für Installation,
Transport oder öffnen von Gehäusen von Personal Computern oder angeschlossenen
Einheiten gelten.
Kabel anschlieβen:
Kabel lösen:
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten und
Netzstecker ziehen.
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten.
2. Zuerst alle Kabel an Einheiten
anschließen.
3. Signalkabel von Anschlußbuchsen lösen.
3. Signalkabel an Anschlußbuchsen
anschließen.
2. Zuerst Netzstecker von Steckdose lösen.
4. Alle Kabel von Einheiten lösen.
4. Netzstecker an Steckdose anschließen.
5. Gerät einschalten.
Appendix B. Related service information
189
v Hinweis 2
ACHTUNG:
Eine verbrauchte Batterie nur durch eine Batterie mit der IBM Teilenummer 33F8354 oder
durch eine vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterie ersetzen. Wenn Ihr System ein Modul mit
einer Lithium-Batterie enthält, ersetzen Sie es immer mit dem selben Modultyp vom selben
Hersteller. Die Batterie enthält Lithium und kann bei unsachgemäßer Verwendung,
Handhabung oder Entsorgung explodieren.
Die Batterie nicht:
v mit Wasser in Berührung bringen.
v über 100 C erhitzen.
v reparieren oder zerlegen.
Die örtlichen Bestimmungen für die Entsorgung von Sondermüll beachten.
v Hinweis 3
ACHTUNG:
Wenn ein Laserprodukt (z. B. CD-ROM-Laufwerke, DVD-Laufwerke, Einheiten mit
Glasfaserkabeln oder Transmitter) installiert ist, beachten Sie folgendes.
v Das Entfernen der Abdeckungen des CD-ROM-Laufwerks kann zu gefährlicher
Laserstrahlung führen. Es befinden sich keine Teile innerhalb des CD-ROM-Laufwerks,
die vom Benutzer gewartet werden müssen. Die Verkleidung des CD-ROM-Laufwerks
nicht öffnen.
v Steuer- und Einstellelemente sowie Verfahren nur entsprechend den Anweisungen im
vorliegenden Handbuch einsetzen. Andernfalls kann gefährliche Laserstrahlung auftreten.
VORSICHT
Manche CD-ROM-Laufwerke enthalten eine eingebaute Laserdiode der Klasse 3A oder 3B.
Die nachfolgend aufgeführten Punkte beachten.
Laserstrahlung bei geöffneter Tür. Niemals direkt in den Laserstrahl sehen, nicht direkt mit
optischen Instrumenten betrachten und den Strahlungsbereich meiden.
190
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Hinweis 4
≥18 kg
ACHTUNG:
≥32 kg
≥55 kg
Beim Anheben der Maschine die vorgeschriebenen Sicherheitsbestimmungen beachten.
v Hinweis 5
ACHTUNG:
Mit dem Betriebsspannungsschalter an der Vorderseite des Servers und dem
Betriebsspannungsschalter am Netzteil wird die Stromversorgung für den Server nicht
unterbrochen. Der Server könnte auch mehr als ein Netzkabel aufweisen. Um die gesamte
Stromversorgung des Servers auszuschalten, muß sichergestellt werden, daß alle Netzkabel
aus den Netzsteckdosen herausgezogen wurden.
2
1
v Hinweis 10
ACHTUNG:
Keine Gegenstände, die mehr als 82 kg wiegen, auf Rack-Einheiten ablegen.
Appendix B. Related service information
191
Importante:
Tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di pericolo riportati nella pubblicazione IBM
documentation iniziano con un numero. Questo numero viene utilizzato per
confrontare avvisi di attenzione o di pericolo in inglese con le versioni tradotte
riportate in questa sezione.
Ad esempio, se un avviso di attenzione inizia con il numero 1, la relativa versione
tradotta è presente in questa sezione con la stessa numerazione.
Prima di eseguire una qualsiasi istruzione, accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di
attenzione e di pericolo.
v Avviso 1
PERICOLO
La corrente elettrica circolante nei cavi di alimentazione, del telefono e di segnale è
pericolosa.
Per evitare il pericolo di scosse elettriche:
v Non collegare o scollegare i cavi, non effettuare l’installazione, la manutenzione o la
riconfigurazione di questo prodotto durante i temporali.
v Collegare tutti i cavi di alimentazione ad una presa elettrica correttamente cablata e
munita di terra di sicurezza.
v Collegare qualsiasi apparecchiatura collegata a questo prodotto ad una presa elettrica
correttamente cablata e munita di terra di sicurezza.
v Quando possibile, collegare o scollegare i cavi di segnale con una sola mano.
v Non accendere qualsiasi apparecchiatura in presenza di fuoco, acqua o se sono presenti
danni all’apparecchiatura stessa.
v Scollegare i cavi di alimentazione, i sistemi di telecomunicazioni, le reti e i modem prima
di aprire i coperchi delle unità, se non diversamente indicato nelle procedure di
installazione e configurazione.
v Collegare e scollegare i cavi come descritto nella seguente tabella quando si effettuano
l’installazione, la rimozione o l’apertura dei coperchi di questo prodotto o delle unità
collegate.
Per collegare:
Per scollegare:
1. SPEGNERE tutti i dispositivi.
1. SPEGNERE tutti i dispositivi.
2. Collegare prima tutti i cavi alle unità.
2. Rimuovere prima i cavi di alimentazione
dalle prese elettriche.
3. Collegare i cavi di segnale ai connettori.
3.
Rimuovere i cavi di segnale dai connettori.
4. Collegare i cavi di alimentazione alle
prese elettriche.
4. Rimuovere tutti i cavi dalle unità.
5. ACCENDERE le unità.
192
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Avviso 2
ATTENZIONE:
Quando si sostituisce la batteria al litio, utilizzare solo una batteria IBM con numero parte
33F8354 o batterie dello stesso tipo o di tipo equivalente consigliate dal produttore. Se il
sistema di cui si dispone è provvisto di un modulo contenente una batteria al litio, sostituire
tale batteria solo con un tipo di modulo uguale a quello fornito dal produttore. La batteria
contiene litio e può esplodere se utilizzata, maneggiata o smaltita impropriamente.
Evitare di:
v Gettarla o immergerla in acqua
v Riscaldarla ad una temperatura superiore ai 100°C
v Cercare di ripararla o smontarla
Smaltire secondo la normativa in vigore (D.Lgs 22 del 5/2/9) e successive disposizioni
nazionali e locali.
v Avviso 3
ATTENZIONE:
Quando si installano prodotti laser come, ad esempio, le unità DVD, CD-ROM, a fibre
ottiche o trasmettitori, prestare attenzione a quanto segue:
v Non rimuovere i coperchi. L’apertura dei coperchi di prodotti laser può determinare
l’esposizione a radiazioni laser pericolose. All’interno delle unità non vi sono parti su cui
effettuare l’assistenza tecnica.
v L’utilizzo di controlli, regolazioni o l’esecuzione di procedure non descritti nel presente
manuale possono provocare l’esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.
PERICOLO
Alcuni prodotti laser contengono all’interno un diodo laser di Classe 3A o Classe 3B.
Prestare attenzione a quanto segue:
Aprendo l’unità vengono emesse radiazioni laser. Non fissare il fascio, non guardarlo
direttamente con strumenti ottici ed evitare l’esposizione diretta al fascio.
Appendix B. Related service information
193
v Avviso 4
≥18 kg
ATTENZIONE:
≥32 kg
≥55 kg
Durante il sollevamento della macchina seguire delle norme di sicurezza.
v Avviso 5
ATTENZIONE:
Il pulsante del controllo dell’alimentazione situato sull’unità e l’interruttore di alimentazione
posto sull’alimentatore non disattiva la corrente elettrica fornita all’unità. L’unità potrebbe
disporre di più di un cavo di alimentazione. Per disattivare la corrente elettrica dall’unità,
accertarsi che tutti i cavi di alimentazione siano scollegati dalla sorgente di alimentazione.
2
1
v Avviso 10
ATTENZIONE:
Non poggiare oggetti che pesano più di 82 kg sulla parte superiore delle unità montate in
rack.
194
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
195
196
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
197
198
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B. Related service information
199
200
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Importante:
Todas las declaraciones de precauciín de esta IBM documentation empiezan con
un número. Dicho número se emplea para establecer una referencia cruzada de
una declaraciín de precauciín o peligro en inglés con las versiones traducidas que
de dichas declaraciones pueden encontrarse en esta secciín.
Por ejemplo, si una declaraciín de peligro empieza con el número 1, las
traducciones de esta declaraciín de precauciín aparecen en esta secciín bajo
Declaraciín 1.
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precauciín y peligro antes de llevar a
cabo cualquier operaciín.
v Declaración 1
PELIGRO
La corriente eléctrica de los cables telefínicos, de alimentaciín y de comunicaciones es
perjudicial.
Para evitar una descarga eléctrica:
v No conecte ni desconecte ningún cable ni realice las operaciones de instalaciín,
mantenimiento o reconfiguraciín de este producto durante una tormenta.
v Conecte cada cable de alimentaciín a una toma de alimentaciín eléctrica con conexiín a
tierra y cableado correctos.
v Conecte a tomas de alimentaciín con un cableado correcto cualquier equipo que vaya a
estar conectado a este producto.
v Si es posible, utilice una sola mano cuando conecte o desconecte los cables de sent.al.
v No encienda nunca un equipo cuando haya riesgos de incendio, de inundaciín o de
daños estructurales.
v Desconecte los cables de alimentaciín, sistemas de telecomunicaciones, redes y mídems
conectados antes de abrir las cubiertas del dispositivo a menos que se indique lo
contrario en los procedimientos de instalaciín y configuraciín.
v Conecte y desconecte los cables tal como se describe en la tabla siguiente cuando
desee realizar una operaciín de instalaciín, de traslado o de apertura de las cubiertas
para este producto o para los dispositivos conectados.
Para la conexin
Para la desconexiín
1. APÁGUELO todo.
1. APÁGUELO todo.
2. En primer lugar, conecte los cables a
los dispositivos.
2. En primer lugar, retire cada cable de
alimentaciín de la toma de alimentaciín.
3. Conecte los cables de señal a los
conectores.
3. Retire los cables de señal de los
conectores.
4. Conecte cada cable de alimentaciín a la 4. Retire los cables de los dispositivos.
toma de alimentaciín.
5. ENCIENDA el dispositivo.
Appendix B. Related service information
201
v Declaración 2
PRECAUCIÓN:
Cuando desee sustituir la batería de litio, utilice únicamente el número de pieza 33F8354 de
IBM o cualquier tipo de batería equivalente que recomiende el fabricante. Si el sistema
tiene un mídulo que contiene una batería de litio, sustitúyalo únicamente por el mismo tipo
de mídulo, que ha de estar creado por el mismo fabricante. La batería contiene litio y puede
explotar si el usuario no la utiliza ni la maneja de forma adecuada o si no se desprende de
la misma como corresponde.
No realice las acciones siguientes:
v Arrojarla al agua o sumergirla
v Calentarla a una temperatura que supere los 100°C (212°F)
v Repararla o desmontarla
Despréndase de la batería siguiendo los requisitos que exija el reglamento o la legislaciín
local.
v Declaración 3
PRECAUCIÓN:
Cuando instale productos láser (como, por ejemplo, CD-ROM, unidades DVD, dispositivos
de fibra íptica o transmisores), tenga en cuenta las advertencias siguientes:
v No retire las cubiertas. Si retira las cubiertas del producto láser, puede quedar expuesto
a radiaciín láser perjudicial. Dentro del dispositivo no existe ninguna pieza que requiera
mantenimiento.
v El uso de controles o ajustes o la realizaciín de procedimientos que no sean los que se
han especificado aquí pueden dar como resultado una exposiciín perjudicial a las
radiaciones.
PELIGRO
Algunos productos láser contienen un diodo de láser incorporado de Clase 3A o de Clase
3B. Tenga en cuenta la advertencia siguiente.
Cuando se abre, hay radiaciín láser. No mire fijamente el rayo ni lleve a cabo ningún
examen directamente con instrumentos ípticos; evite la exposiciín directa al rayo.
202
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
v Declaración 4
≥18 kg
PRECAUCIÓN:
≥32 kg
≥55 kg
Tome medidas de seguridad al levantar el producto.
v Declaración 5
PRECAUCIÓN:
El botín de control de alimentaciín del dispositivo y el interruptor de alimentaciín de la
fuente de alimentaciín no apagan la corriente eléctrica suministrada al dispositivo. Es
posible también que el dispositivo tenga más de un cable de alimentaciín. Para eliminar la
corriente eléctrica del dispositivo, asegúrese de desconectar todos los cables de
alimentaciín de la fuente de alimentaciín.
2
1
v Declaración 10
PRECAUCIÓN:
No coloque ningún objeto que pese más de 82 kg (180 libras) encima de los dispositivos
montados en bastidor.
Appendix B. Related service information
203
204
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix C. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Edition notice
© COPYRIGHT INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION, 2002,
2003. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights — Use, duplication or disclosure
restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2002
205
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation
in the United States, other countries, or both:
Active Memory
Active PCI
Active PCI-X
Alert on LAN
C2T Interconnect
Chipkill
EtherJet
e-business logo
Eserver
FlashCopy
IBM
IntelliStation
Light Path Diagnostics
NetBAY
Netfinity
NetView
OS/2 WARP
Predictive Failure Analysis
PS/2
ServeRAID
ServerGuide
ServerProven
TechConnect
Tivoli
Tivoli Enterprise
Update Connector
Wake on LAN
XA-32
XA-64
X-Architecture
XceL4
XpandOnDemand
xSeries
Lotus, Lotus Notes, SmartSuite, and Domino are trademarks of Lotus Development
Corporation and/or IBM Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
ActionMedia, LANDesk, MMX, Pentium, and ProShare are trademarks of Intel
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of
others.
Important notes
Processor speeds indicate the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.
CD-ROM drive speeds list the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the maximum possible.
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for approximately 1000 bytes, MB stands for approximately 1 000 000
bytes, and GB stands for approximately 1 000 000 000 bytes.
206
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity may vary depending on operating environments.
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives available from IBM.
Maximum memory may require replacement of the standard memory with an
optional memory module.
IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and
services that are ServerProven, including but not limited to the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered and
warranted solely by third parties.
IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.
Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.
Some software may differ from its retail version (if available), and may not include
user manuals or all program functionality.
Product recycling and disposal
This unit contains materials such as circuit boards, cables, electromagnetic
compatibility gaskets, and connectors which may contain lead and copper/beryllium
alloys that require special handling and disposal at end of life. Before this unit is
disposed of, these materials must be removed and recycled or discarded according
to applicable regulations. IBM offers product-return programs in several countries.
For country-specific instructions, refer to the following Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.shtml.
This product may contain a sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal
hydride, lithium, or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service
manual for specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or
disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area.
For information on disposal of batteries, contact your local waste disposal
facility.
In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse, recycling,
or proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal
hydride, and battery packs from IBM equipment. For information on proper disposal
of these batteries, contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Have the IBM part number listed
on the battery available prior to your call.
Electronic emission notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
Appendix C. Notices
207
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors
must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits.IBM is not responsible for any
radio or television interference causedby using other than recommended cables and
connectors or by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement
Notice to Customers
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect
connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
208
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
Taiwanese Class A warning statement
Chinese Class A warning statement
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement
Appendix C. Notices
209
210
xSeries 235 Type 8671: Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide
򔻐򗗠򙳰
Part Number: 24P2965
(1P) P/N: 24P2965
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement